Magnetek IMPULSE®•D+ Owner's Manual

Add to My manuals
212 Pages

advertisement

Magnetek IMPULSE®•D+ Owner's Manual | Manualzz

IMPULSE

®

•D+ AC Regenerative System

Instruction Manual

Software #2006 and 3014 April 2016

Part Number: 146-50079 R0

© Copyright 2016 Magnetek

Preface and Safety

All rights reserved. This notice applies to all copyrighted materials included with this product, including, but not limited to, this manual and software embodied within the product. This manual is intended for the sole use of the persons to whom it was provided, and any unauthorized distribution of the manual or dispersal of its contents is strictly forbidden. This manual may not be reproduced in whole or in part by any means whatsoever without the expressed written permission of Magnetek.

MECHATROLINK-I/MECHATROLINK-II are trademarks of MECHATROLINK Members Association

(MMA). Other companies and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks of those companies.

Product Safety Information

Magnetek, Inc. (Magnetek) offers a broad range of radio remote control products, control products and adjustable frequency drives, power delivery systems, and industrial braking systems for material handling applications. This manual has been prepared by Magnetek to provide information and recommendations for the installation, use, operation and service of Magnetek’s material handling products and systems (Magnetek Products). Anyone who uses, operates, maintains, services, installs or owns Magnetek Products should know, understand and follow the instructions and safety recommendations in this manual for Magnetek Products.

The recommendations in this manual do not take precedence over any of the following requirements relating to cranes, hoists, lifting devices or other equipment which use or include Magnetek

Products:

• Instructions, manuals, and safety warnings of the manufacturers of the equipment where the

Magnetek Products are used,

• Plant safety rules and procedures of the employers and the owners of the facilities where the

Magnetek Products are being used,

• Regulations issued by the Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA),

• Applicable local, state, provincial, or federal codes, ordinances, standards and requirements, or

• Safety standards and practices for the industries in which Magnetek Products are used.

This manual does not include or address the specific instructions and safety warnings of these manufacturers or any of the other requirements listed above. It is the responsibility of the owners, users and operators of the Magnetek Products to know, understand and follow all of these requirements. It is the responsibility of the employer to make its employees aware of all of the above listed requirements and to make certain that all operators are properly trained.

No one should use

Magnetek Products prior to becoming familiar with and being trained in these requirements and the instructions and safety recommendations for this manual.

Product Warranty Information

Magnetek, hereafter referred to as Company, assumes no responsibility for improper programming of a device (such as a drive or radio) by untrained personnel. A device should only be programmed by a trained technician who has read and understands the contents of the relevant manual(s).

Improper programming of a device can lead to unexpected, undesirable, or unsafe operation or performance of the device. This may result in damage to equipment or personal injury. Company shall not be liable for economic loss, property damage, or other consequential damages or physical injury sustained by the purchaser or by any third party as a result of such programming. Company neither assumes nor authorizes any other person to assume for Company any other liability in connection with the sale or use of this product.

For information on Magnetek’s product warranties by product type, please visit www.magnetek.com.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 i

DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE Statements

Read and understand this manual before installing, operating, or servicing the converter. The converter must be installed according to this manual and local codes.

The following conventions indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to heed these messages could cause fatal injury or damage products and related equipment and systems.

D A N G E R

DANGER

indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal word is to be limited to the most extreme situations.

WA R N I N G

WARNING

indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

C A U T I O N

CAUTION

indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

N O T I C E

NOTICE

indicates a potential equipment damage message.

NOTE: A NOTE statement is used to notify installation, operation, programming, or maintenance information that is important, but not hazard-related.

Supplemental Safety Information

General Precautions

• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details.

Replace the covers or shields before operating the converter and run the converter according to the instructions described in this manual.

• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.

• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.

• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek customer service department and provide the manual number shown on the front cover.

• If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, contact Magnetek.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 ii

Safety Messages

D A N G E R

Heed the safety messages in this manual.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.

Electrical Shock Hazard

Do not install, wire, maintain, or inspect the product or replace parts while the power supply is turned on.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

Disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the converter before touching any components.

Do not turn on the power supply or supply power to the input-side AC reactor or to the harmonic filter (harmonic filter module) only.

Voltage will remain in the internal capacitor and will result in death or serious injury. Always connect a converter as shown in the Standard Connection Diagram before you turn on the power supply.

WA R N I N G

Sudden Movement Hazard

System may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious injury.

Clear all personnel from the converter, drive, motor and machine area before applying power to the converter. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys and machine loads.

Electrical Shock Hazard

Do not attempt to modify or alter the converter in any way not explained in this manual.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Magnetek is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.

Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the converter.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Installation, maintenance, inspection, and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment, and maintenance of converters.

Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 iii

WA R N I N G

Electrical Shock Hazard

Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.

Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical potentials on equipment chassis, which could result in death or serious injury.

Make sure the protective earthing conductor complies with technical standards and local safety regulations.

Because the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA in model 41040-D+ IEC/EN 61800-5-1 states that either the power supply must be automatically disconnected in case of discontinuity of the protective earthing conductor or a protective earthing conductor with a cross-section of at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or

16 mm2 (Al) must be used. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.

Use appropriate equipment for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI).

This converter can cause a residual current with a DC component in the protective earthing conductor.

Where a residual current operated protective or monitoring device is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, always use a GFCI of type B according to IEC/EN60755.

Do not operate equipment with covers removed.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Fire Hazard

Do not use an improper voltage source.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.

Verify that the rated voltage of the converter matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.

When installing an IP00/IP20 converter in a closed panel or cabinet, sufficiently cool the panel or cabinet with a cooling fan or air conditioner so that the air temperature entering the converter is 50°C (122°F) or cooler.

Failure to comply could result in overheating and fire.

Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.

Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections.

Do not use improper combustible materials.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.

Do not install the converter to a combustible surface. Never place combustible materials on the converter.

Crush Hazard

Only allow qualified personnel to operate a crane or hoist to transport the converter.

Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death from falling equipment.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 iv

C A U T I O N

Do not carry the converter by the front cover or the terminal cover.

Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the converter falling.

Hold the specified locations when carrying a harmonic filter module by hand.

Holding any other location when carrying the harmonic filter module could cause the module could fall and cause injury.

Carry all standard configuration and peripheral devices in a method suitable for the weight of the device.

Incorrectly handling devices could cause them to fall and result in injury or damage to the device.

N O T I C E

Do not disconnect the wiring to the converter and harmonic filter module while the converter is outputting a voltage.

Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the converter.

When connecting a converter, use a power supply with a capacity that is the same or higher than the capacity calculated by the power supply capacity selection formula in Selecting the

Power Supply Capacity on page i-vii.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter.

Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the converter, circuit boards, and CMOSIC.

Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the converter circuitry.

Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the converter.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the sensitive devices within the converter.

Do not operate damaged equipment.

Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.

Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.

Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter.

The converter is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical

Amperes, 240 VAC maximum (230 V Class) and 480 VAC maximum (460 V Class).

Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the converter during converter installation and project construction.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter. Place a temporary cover over the top during installation. Be sure to remove the temporary cover before start-up, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the converter to overheat.

Never lift the converter up while the cover is removed.

This can damage the terminal board and other components.

Do not perform signal checks during operation.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 v

N O T I C E

Check the following items before you turn on the power supply.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter and harmonic filter module.

• Is the power supply voltage correct?

230 V Class: 190 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz

460 V Class: 380 to 480 VAC 50/60 Hz

• Are the converter and the control devices connected properly (e.g., is the phase order correct)?

• Is the phase order correct between the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) on the converter and the power supply voltage detection terminals (r1/ 11, 1/ 21, 31).

• Are the control circuit terminals on the converter connected properly to the control devices?

• Are the Run Commands for the converter and the control devices turned off?

Replace the cooling fan correctly according to instructions in this manual.

Incorrect cooling fan mounting direction will prevent sufficient cooling of the converter and could damage internal circuits.

Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring.

Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance.

Magnetek is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.

Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the converter and connecting any other devices.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter.

To get the full performance life out of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays, refrain from switching the converter power supply off and on more than once every 30 minutes.

If a fuse is blown or Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of the peripheral devices.

Contact your supplier if the cause cannot be identified after checking the above.

Do not restart the converter or immediately operate the peripheral devices if a fuse is blown or an equipment for RCD is tripped.

Check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause.

Contact your supplier before restarting the converter or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.

Do not expose the converter to halogen group disinfectants.

Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the converter.

Do not pack the converter in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized.

Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 vi

General Application Precautions

Total Load Capacity

Select a converter with a capacity (P out

) greater than the value of P

1

.

<1> The drive capacity is the power capacity during a normal operating condition when energy is applied to the motor. The regenerative capacity is the capacity that is generated when the flow of power is reversed, such as when the drive is decelerated or the load is lowered.

<2> Use the efficiencies of the motors and drives when known. When they are not known, use a motor efficiency of 0.9 (0.85 for 7.5 kW or less) and a drive efficiency of 0.95 (0.9 for 7.5 kW or less).

NOTE: When the interphase voltage imbalance ratio of the power source exceeds 2%, use a converter with a frame one size larger than is otherwise necessary.

Calculate the interphase voltage imbalance ratio of the power source using the following formula: (Conforms to IEC/EN61800-3 (5.2.3).)

Selecting the Power Supply Capacity

Connect a power supply with a capacity (kVA) that is larger than the rated input capacity (kW) of the converter.

Connecting a power supply with a capacity smaller than the rated input capacity may trigger an operating fault. If it is necessary to connect a power supply with a capacity smaller than the rated input capacity, consult your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Power supply capacity ≥ √ 3 × Input power supply rated voltage × Rated AC input current ÷ 1000

Installing an Input-side AC Reactor and Harmonic Filter Module

Each converter requires a corresponding input-side AC reactor and harmonic filter module that consider the saturation current and thermal factors. Always install the specified devices.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 vii

Regenerative Converter Power Losses and Harmonic Filter Installation

Sequence the power supply for the converter so the circuit opens after the operation is stopped.

Install the specified harmonic filter (harmonic filter module) to reduce the impact of voltage surges on other devices when the circuit opens for any unexpected reason during operation. Refer to Harmonic

Filter Module Wiring on page 3-22 for detailed information on the harmonic filter (harmonic filter module).

Installation

Enclosure Panels

Keep the converter in a clean environment by installing the converter in an enclosure panel or selecting an installation area free of airborne dust, lint, and oil mist. Be sure to leave the required space between converters to provide for cooling, and take proper measures so the ambient temperature remains within allowable limits and keep flammable materials away from the converter.

Magnetek offers protective designs for converters that must be used in areas subjected to oil mist and excessive vibration. Contact Magnetek for details.

Installation Direction

NOTICE:

Install the converter upright as specified in the manual. Refer to Mechanical Installation on page 2-1 for more information on installation. Failure to comply may damage the converter due to improper cooling.

Interlock

An interlock is required between the converter and drive to stop the drive if the converter fails or if a fault occurs in the converter. It is also necessary to provide a suitable time to restart the drive if it will be restarted for momentary power losses.

Restarting can be timed with the “During MC ON” signal output from the converter control circuit terminals. Create a sequence to turn off the output from the drive with an external baseblock input to the drive or by a similar means when the “During MC ON” signal opens. For details, refer to the

Standard Connection Diagram on page 3-3.

Example 1: Not Restarting for Momentary Power Losses (Coasting to a Stop for Momentary

Power Losses)

Connect the “During MC ON” output from the converter to the external fault input on the drive.

Use an N.C. input for the external fault input on the drive and set the drive to detect external faults only during operation to prevent an external fault from being detected when the power supply is turned on.

Example 2: Restarting the System for Momentary Power Losses

Change the setting for the external baseblock input terminal S8 on the drive from the default setting of an N.O. contact to an N.C. contact.

Connect the “During MC ON” output from the converter to the external baseblock input on the drive and set restarting for momentary power losses in the drive.

NOTE: An external baseblock is not set by default in IMPULSE

®

G+ Mini or IMPULSE

®

T. Set an external baseblock (N.C.) for one of the multi-function input terminals.

Example 3: Inputting a Run Command to the drive

Always input Run commands to the drive while the converter is operating. Check converter operating status with a During Run 1 signal on a multi-function output. Refer to Figure 3-1: Standard

Connection Diagram for an example of a drive sequence.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 viii

General Handling

Wiring Check

NOTICE:

Do not connect power supply lines to output terminals. Failure to comply will destroy the converter or the harmonic filter module. Be sure to perform a final check of all sequence wiring and other connections before turning on the power and also check for short circuits on the control terminals, which may damage the converter.

Inspection and Maintenance

WA R N I N G

Electrical Shock Hazard.

Capacitors in the converter do not immediately discharge after shutting off the power. Wait for at least the amount of time specified on the converter before touching any components after shutting off the power. Failure to comply may cause injury to personnel from electrical shock.

Burn Hazard.

Because the heatsink can get very hot during operation, take proper precautions to prevent burns. When replacing the cooling fan, shut off the power and wait at least 15 minutes to be sure that the heatsink has cooled down. Failure to comply may cause burn injury to personnel.

To connect or perform maintenance for the harmonic filter module, turn off the power supply to the converter, wait for the time that is given on the converter, and then confirm that the temperature of the reactor has sufficiently decreased before you proceed.

Wiring

Magnetek recommends using ring terminals on all models. Converters require the use of ring terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping.

Transporting the Converter

NOTICE:

Never steam clean the converter. During transport, keep the converter from coming into contact with salts, fluorine, bromine, phthalate ester, and other such harmful chemicals.

C A U T I O N

Crush Hazard.

Carry all standard configuration and peripheral devices in a method suitable for the weight of the device. Incorrectly handling devices could cause them to fall and result in injury or damage to the device.

Crush Hazard.

When standing up and lifting model 41040-D+, move the eye bolts to the top panel and lift the converter from the four eye bolts on the top panel. Failure to comply may cause the converter to fall and cause injury. Refer to Precautions and Instructions for

Installation on page 2-6 for details.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 ix

Precautions on Using Peripheral Devices

Install a reactor-type noise filter without a capacitor such as a zero phase reactor after the MCCB on the power supply side when installing a noise filter on the power supply.

NOTICE:

Do not install a filter with a built-in capacitor. The harmonic components may cause the capacitor to overheat or may damage the capacitor. Always install the specified harmonic noise filter.

Selecting a Circuit Breaker or Circuit Interrupter

• Magnetek recommends installing a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) to the power supply side. The GFCI should be designed for use with AC drives (e.g., Type B according to IEC/

EN60755).

• Select a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) according to the power factor of the converter power supply. The power factor changes with the power supply voltage, output frequency, and load.

When using a GFCI that is not recommended, be sure to choose a GFCI with harmonic countermeasures and one with a rated operating current of 30 mA minimium for each connected converter. High-frequency leakage current can cause malfunctions. When a GFCI without countermeasures malfunctions, replace the GFCI with a rated operating current of 200 mA minimum for each connected converter.

• Select a GFCI or MCCB with a rated trip capacity equal to or higher than the power supply short circuit current.

Magnetic Contactor Installation

Magnetek recommends installing a magnetic contactor (MC) between the power supply and the converter to ensure that the power to the converter can be shut off. Create a sequence in which the

MC is turned off by the fault output from the converter.

Wire Gauges and Wiring Distances

Use a motor cable gauge large enough to avoid unstable converter phase control from voltage drop caused by a long motor cable.

When using the digital operator remotely, always use the cable specified (option). When controlling the converter remotely using analog signals, limit the length of the control lines between the control signals and converter to 50 m or shorter and separate the control lines from power lines (main circuit and sequence circuits) to prevent induction from peripheral devices.

When using a multi-function analog input, connect the shield wire to the sheath ground terminal E

(G) with shielded twisted-pair wires. Refer to Standard Connection Diagram on page 3-3 for details.

Generator Power Supplies

Select a generator with two times the capacity of the converter input power supply. Select the deceleration time, load, and other factors so that the regenerative power from the motor is 10% or less of the capacity of the generator. For details, consult Magnetek.

Connecting an Advanced-phase Capacitor or Thyristor-controlled Device to the Power

Supply

An advanced-phase capacitor is not required for the converter. Installing an advanced-phase capacitor will reduce the power factor.

If an advanced-phase capacitor currently exists is in the same power supply system as the converter, install a series reactor on the advanced-phase capacitor to prevent resonance with the converter.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 x

If a device that generates voltage surge or voltage distortion, such as a thyristor-controlled DC drive or electromagnetic mixer is installed in the same power supply system as the converter, consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Countermeasures for EMC and High-frequency (Harmonic) Leakage Current

Although countermeasures are not required for harmonic currents, the same countermeasures for electrical interference (EMC) and high-frequency (harmonic) leakage current are required as for a normal drive. If there are nearby devices that are easily affected by electrical interference, use a reactor-type noise filter (e.g., zero phase reactor).

When installing an MCCB or GFCI at the power supply, use an MCCB or GFCI that is designed for a drive (i.e., one that has countermeasures for high-frequency leakage current).

Compliance with Harmonic Suppression Guidelines

• Guidelines for harmonic suppression measures are applicable to consumers that receive power from a 6.6 kV or higher system. For details, refer to the Harmonics Suppression Technical

Guideline JEAG 9702-1995.

• With respect to the harmonic suppression guidelines, the converter is equivalent to a threephase bridge that does not generate harmonics (K5 =0), but the harmonic component is not completely zero.

Impact of Power Supply Distortion

Distorting the power supply voltage and connecting several devices in parallel to the same power supply will cause power supply system harmonics to flow into the converter and increase the harmonic content.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 xi

Warranty Information

Restrictions

The converter is not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly affect or threaten human lives or health.

Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems relating to transportation, health care, space aviation, atomic power, electric power, or in underwater applications must first contact their Magnetek representatives or the Magnetek service department.

WA R N I N G

Injury to Personnel.

This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this product is to be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve or result in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a facility where failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the likelihood of any accident.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016 xii

Contents

Preface and Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-i

Product Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-i

Product Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-i

DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-ii

Supplemental Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-ii

Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-iii

Precautions on Using Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-x

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-xii

Chapter 1: Receiving

Model Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Converter Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Chapter 2: Mechanical Installation

Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Installation Orientation and Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Precautions and Instructions for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Harmonic Filter Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Installation Orientation and Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Harmonic Filter Module Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Standard Configuration Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Input-side AC Reactor 1 - Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Input-side AC Reactor 2 - Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Reactor for Harmonic Filter - Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Capacitor for Harmonic Filter - Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Chapter 3: Electrical Installation

Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Main Circuit Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

2015-D+ to 2057-D+; 4008-D+ to 4030-D+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

2083-D+, 2140-D+; 4043-D+, 4058-D+, 4086-D+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

2200-D+, 2270-D+, 2400-D+; 4145-D+, 4210-D+, 4300-D+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

4410-D+, 4560-D+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

41040-D+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Terminal Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Main Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Main Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Protecting Main Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Ground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Harmonic Filter Module Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Protecting Circuit Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Control I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Terminal A2 Input Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Using the Contact Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Wiring Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Chapter 4: Start-Up Programming & Operation

Using the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

LCD Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

ALARM (ALM) LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Menu Structure for Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

The Drive and Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes (Default Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Changing Parameter Settings or Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Powering Up the Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Powering Up the Converter and Operation Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Operation with the Drive Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

IMPULSE®•G+/VG+ Series 4 Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Timing Chart for Turning the Power Supply On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Backing Up Parameter Values: o2-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Parameter Access Level: A1-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Test Run Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Chapter 5: Troubleshooting

Alarms, Faults, and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Alarm and Error Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Operator Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

Operator Programming Error Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Copy Function Related Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Diagnosing and Resetting Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Fault Reset Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Chapter 6: Standard Configuration Devices, Peripheral Devices, and Options

Converter Options and Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Standard Configuration Devices Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Installing Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Installing a Magnetic Contactor at the Power Supply Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Connecting a Surge Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Attachment for External Heatsink Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Appendix A: Specifications

Power Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3

Converter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-4

Heat Loss Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6

Derating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7

Temperature Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

Appendix B: Parameter List

Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3

Parameter Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4

A: Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 d: References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

F: Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

H: Multi-Function Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

L: Protection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 o: Operator-Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20

U: Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24

Defaults by Converter Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-34

Appendix C: Standards Compliance

Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3

European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5

CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

EMC Guidelines Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

UL Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-16

UL Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16

UL Standards Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

Installing Input Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C h a p t e r

1

Receiving

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

1-2

This page intentionally left blank.

Model Numbers

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

1-3

Converter Models

Voltage Class

230 V Class Models

460 V Class Models

Table 1-1: Models

Model Number

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

4008-D+

4016-D+

4030-D+

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

1-4

C h a p t e r

2

Mechanical Installation

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-2

This page intentionally left blank.

Mechanical Installation

This section outlines specifications, procedures, and the environment for proper mechanical installation of the converter and the harmonic filter module.

Installation Environment

Install the converter in an environment matching the specifications in Table 2-1 to help prolong the optimum performance life of the converter.

Table 2-1: Installation Environments

Environment

Installation Area

Ambient

Temperature

Humidity

Storage

Temperature

Surrounding Area

Altitude

Vibration

Orientation

Conditions

Indoors

-10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)

Converter reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.

When using the converter in an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure that the air temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.

Do not allow ice to develop on the converter or the harmonic filter module.

95% RH or less and free of condensation

-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to +140 °F)

Install the converter and the harmonic filter module in an area free from:

• oil mist and dust

• metal shavings, oil, water, or other foreign materials

• radioactive materials

• combustible materials (e.g., wood)

• harmful gases and liquids

• excessive vibration

• chlorides

• direct sunlight.

1000 m (3281 ft.) or lower, up to 3000 m (9843 ft.) with derating. Refer to Derating

Data, starting on page A-7, for details.

10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s

2

4145-D+)

, 20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s

2

(2015-D+ to 2140-D+, 4008-D+ to

10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s

2

4560-D+)

, 20 to 55 Hz at 2.0 m/s

2

(2200-D+ to 2400-D+, 4210-D+ to

10 to 20 Hz at 5.9 m/s

2

, 20 to 55 Hz at 2.0 m/s

2

(41040-D+)

Install the converter vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects.

N O T I C E

Avoid placing converter peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the converter as the noise created can lead to erroneous operation. If such devices must be used in close proximity to the converter, take proper steps to shield the converter from noise.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-3

N O T I C E

Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings and wire clippings from falling into the converter during installation. Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter.

Place a temporary cover over the top of the converter during installation. Remove the temporary cover before converter start-up, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the converter to overheat.

Installation Orientation and Spacing

Install the converter upright as illustrated in Figure 2-1 to maintain proper cooling.

Figure 2-1: Correct Installation Orientation

Single Converter Installation

Figure 2-2 shows the installation distance required to maintain sufficient space for airflow and wiring.

Install the heatsink against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the heatsink.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-4

Figure 2-2: Correct Installation Spacing (Single)

Parallel Mounting with Drive

When installing the converter beside a drive, mount the devices according to Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3: Space Between Converter and Drive (Parallel Mounting)

Side-by-Side Installation with Drive

Models 2015-D+ to 2057-D+ and 4008-D+ to 4030-D+ can take advantage of Side-by-Side installation.

When installing the converter beside a drive, mount the devices according to Figure 2-4 and set L8-

35, Installation Method Selection, to 1 (Side-by-Side Mounting).

When mounting converters with the minimum clearance of 2 mm according to Figure 2-5, set parameter L8-35 to 1 while considering derating. Refer to Parameter Tables on page B-4 for details.

Figure 2-4: Space Between Converter and Drive (Side-by-Side)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-5

NOTE: Align the tops of the converter and the drives when installing the converter and the drives of different heights in the same enclosure panel. Leave space between the tops and bottoms of stacked converter and drives for easier cooling fan replacement.

Installation Screws

Refer to Exterior and Mounting Dimensions on page 2-8 for the sizes of the installation screws.

Precautions and Instructions for Installation

Read the following precautions and instructions before installing models 4410-D+ to 41040-D+.

WA R N I N G

CRUSH HAZARD.

Observe the following instructions and precautions. Failure to comply could result in serious injury or death from falling equipment:

• Only use vertical suspension to temporarily lift the converter during installation to an enclosure panel.

• Do not use vertical suspension to transport the converter.

• Use screws to securely affix the converter front cover, terminal blocks, and other converter components prior to vertical suspension.

• Do not subject the converter to vibration or impact greater than 1.96 m/s2 (0.2 G) while it is suspended by the wires.

• Do not attempt to flip the converter over while it is suspended by the wires.

• Do not leave the converter unattended while it is suspended by the wires.

Horizontal Suspension of Models 2200-D+ to 2400-D+ and 4210-D+ to 4560-D+

To make a wire hanger or frame for use when lifting the converter with a crane, lay the converter in a horizontal position and pass a wire through the holes of the four eye bolts.

N O T I C E

Damage to equipment. When lifting the converter, confirm that the spring washer is fully closed. Failure to comply may deform or damage the converter when lifted.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-6

Figure 2-5: Details of Spring Washers

Vertical Suspension of Models 2200-D+ to 2400-D+ and 4210-D+ to 41040-D+

Models 2200-D+ to 2400-D+ and 4210-D+ to 4560-D+

When vertical suspension of the converter is required in an enclosure panel, the orientation of the eye bolts for these converter models can be easily changed by turning the eye bolts counterclockwise 90 degrees.

Figure 2-6: Adjusting Angle of Eye Bolts

Model 41040-D+

When suspending model 41040-D+ with wires, make sure to follow the procedure described below.

WA R N I N G

CRUSH HAZARD.

Use an adequate length of wire to ensure a 50° or wider suspension angle as illustrated in Figure 2-9. The maximum allowable load of the eye bolts cannot be guaranteed when the converter is suspended with the wires at angles less than 50°. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death from falling equipment.

1. Remove the four eye bolts from the converter side panels and fix them securely on the top panel.

Figure 2-7: Eye Bolt Repositioning

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-7

2. Pass wire through the holes of all four eye bolts.

Figure 2-8: Suspension Wire Angle Example

3. Gradually take up the slack in the wires and hoist the converter after the wires are stretched tight.

4. Lower the converter when ready to install in the enclosure panel. Stop lowering the converter when it is near the floor then begin lowering the converter again very slowly until the converter is placed correctly.

N O T I C E

Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive or converter during installation and project construction. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or converter. Place a temporary cover over the top of the drive and converter during installation. Remove the temporary cover before drive and converter startup, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the drive or converter to overheat.

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Use Table 2-2 to find the converter dimension drawings.

Table 2-2: Models and Types

Protective Design

IP20/Open Type Enclosure

IP00/Open Type Enclosure

Converter Model

Three-Phase

230 V Class

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

Three-Phase

460 V Class

4008-D+

4016-D+

4030-D+

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

Page

2-9

2-10

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-8

IMPULSE

®

D+ Dimensions

Table 2-3: Dimensions for 230 V Class

Model

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

Figure

1

1

2

W

7.09

(180)

7.09

(180)

8.66

(220)

H

11.81

(300)

11.81

(300)

14.37

(365)

D

7.36

(187)

7.36

(187)

7.76

(197)

W1

6.3

(160)

6.3

(160)

7.56

(192)

H0

--

--

Dimensions in (mm)

13.78

(350)

H1

11.18

(284)

11.18

(284)

13.19

(335)

H2

0.31

(8)

0.31

(8)

0.31

(8)

H3

--

--

0.59

(15)

D1

2.95

(75)

2.95

(75)

3.07

(78)

t1

0.2

(5)

0.2

(5)

0.2

(5)

--

--

t2

--

d

M5

M5

M6

Wt.

lb (kg)

11.02

(5)

11.02

(5)

17.64

(8)

Table 2-4: Dimensions for 460 V Class

Model

4008-D+

4016-D+

4030-D+

Figure

1

1

2

W

7.09

(180)

7.09

(180)

8.66

(220)

H

11.81

(300)

11.81

(300)

14.37

(365)

D

7.36

(187)

7.36

(187)

7.76

(197)

W1

6.3

(160)

6.3

(160)

7.56

(192)

H0

--

--

Dimensions in (mm)

13.78

(350)

H1

11.18

(284)

11.18

(284)

13.19

(335)

H2

0.31

(8)

0.31

(8)

0.31

(8)

H3

--

--

0.59

(15)

D1

2.95

(75)

2.95

(75)

3.07

(78)

t1

0.2

(5)

0.2

(5)

0.2

(5)

t2

--

--

--

d

M5

M5

M6

Wt.

lb (kg)

11.02

(5)

11.02

(5)

17.64

(8)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-9

IMPULSE

®

D+ Dimensions

Table 2-5: Dimensions for 230 V Class

Model

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

Figure

1

1

2

2

3

W

10.83

(275)

12.8

(325)

17.72

(450)

17.72

(450)

19.69

(500)

H

17.72

(450)

21.65

(550)

27.76

(705)

27.76

(705)

31.5

(800)

D

10.16

(258)

11.14

(283)

12.99

(330)

12.99

(330)

13.78

(350)

Dimensions in (mm)

W1

8.66

(220)

10.24

(260)

12.8

(325)

12.8

(325)

14.57

(370)

H1

17.13

(435)

21.06

(535)

26.77

(680)

26.77

(680)

30.43

(773)

H2

0.3

(7.5)

0.3

(7.5)

0.49

(12.5)

0.49

(12.5)

0.51

(13)

D1

3.94

(100)

4.33

(110)

5.12

(130)

5.12

(130)

5.12

(130)

t1

0.09

(2.3)

0.09

(2.3)

0.13

(3.2)

0.13

(3.2)

0.18

(4.5)

t2

0.09

(2.3)

0.09

(2.3)

0.13

(3.2)

0.13

(3.2)

0.18

(4.5)

d

M6

M6

M10

M10

M12

Wt.

lb (kg)

44.09

(20)

70.55

(32)

125.66

(57)

134.48

(61)

187.39

(85)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-10

Table 2-6: Dimensions for 460 V Class

Model

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

Figure

1

1

1

1

3

3

3

3

4

H

31.5

(800)

31.5

(800)

44.88

(1140)

44.88

(1140)

54.33

(1380)

17.72

(450)

17.72

(450)

21.65

(550)

21.65

(550)

W

19.69

(500)

19.69

(500)

26.38

(670)

26.38

(670)

49.21

(1250)

10.83

(275)

10.83

(275)

12.8

(325)

12.8

(325)

D

13.78

(350)

13.78

(350)

14.57

(370)

14.57

(370)

14.57

(370)

10.16

(258)

10.16

(258)

11.14

(283)

11.14

(283)

H1

30.43

(773)

30.43

(773)

43.7

(1110)

43.7

(1110)

52.95

(1345)

17.13

(435)

17.13

(435)

21.06

(535)

21.06

(535)

Dimensions in (mm)

W1

14.57

(370)

14.57

(370)

17.32

(440)

17.32

(440)

43.31

(1100)

8.66

(220)

8.66

(220)

10.24

(260)

10.24

(260)

H2

0.51

(13)

0.51

(13)

0.59

(15)

0.59

(15)

0.59

(15)

0.3

(7.5)

0.3

(7.5)

0.3

(7.5)

0.3

(7.5)

D1

5.12

(130)

5.12

(130)

5.91

(150)

5.91

(150)

5.91

(150)

3.94

(100)

3.94

(100)

4.33

(110)

4.33

(110)

t1

0.18

(4.5)

0.18

(4.5)

0.18

(4.5)

0.18

(4.5)

0.18

(4.5)

0.09

(2.3)

0.09

(2.3)

0.09

(2.3)

0.09

(2.3)

t2

0.18

(4.5)

0.18

(4.5)

0.18

(4.5)

0.18

(4.5)

0.18

(4.5)

0.09

(2.3)

0.09

(2.3)

0.09

(2.3)

0.09

(2.3)

d

M6

M6

M6

M6

M12

M12

M12

M12

M12

Wt.

lb (kg)

187.39

(85)

187.39

(85)

403.45

(183)

427.7

(194)

910.51

(413)

46.3

(21)

46.3

(21)

74.96

(34)

74.96

(34)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-11

Harmonic Filter Module Installation

Installation Environment

Install the harmonic filter module in an environment matching the specifications in Table 2-7 to help prolong the optimum performance life of the harmonic filter module.

Table 2-7: Installation Environment

Environment

Installation Area

Ambient

Temperature

Humidity

Storage

Temperature

Surrounding Area

Altitude

Vibration

Conditions

Indoors

Install the converter in an environment that does not easily accessible such as control panel.

IP00/Open Type enclosure: -10°C to +50°C (14 °F to 122 °F)

Harmonic filter module reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.

When using the harmonic filter module in an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure that the air temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.

Do not allow ice to develop on the harmonic filter module.

95% RH or less and free of condensation

-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to +140 °F)

Install the converter and the harmonic filter module in an area free from:

• oil mist and dust

• metal shavings, oil, water, or other foreign materials

• radioactive materials

• combustible materials (e.g., wood)

• harmful gases and liquids

• excessive vibration

• chlorides

• direct sunlight.

3000 m (9843 ft.) or lower

2.0 m/s2 (20 to 55 Hz)

N O T I C E

Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings and wire clippings from falling into the converter and harmonic filter module during installation. Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter and the harmonic filter module. Place a temporary cover over the top of the converter and the harmonic filter module during installation. Remove the temporary cover before converter and harmonic filter module start-up, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the converter and the harmonic filter module to overheat.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-12

Installation Orientation and Spacing

Installation Orientation

Install the harmonic filter module on the floor with the faceplate facing forward.

Figure 2-9: Correct Installation Orientation

Installation Spacing

Figure 2-10 shows the installation distance required to maintain sufficient space for airflow and wiring.

Figure 2-10: Installation Spacing

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-13

Precautions and Instructions for Installation of Harmonic Filter Module

Read the following precautions and instructions before installing a harmonic filter module.

WA R N I N G

Always observe the following precautions. If handled incorrectly, the harmonic filter module may fall, possibly causing injury. Also, the harmonic filter module may be damaged.

• Suspend the harmonic filter module with wires only temporarily and only when installing them in a control panel. Do not suspend them when transporting them.

• Before you suspend the harmonic filter module, confirm that faceplate, top cover, and other configuration components are securely screwed in place.

• Do not place the harmonic filter module on its side.

• Do not leave the harmonic filter module suspended with wires for a long period of time.

Attach hooks to the specified locations when suspending the harmonic filter module with wires.

N O T I C E

Do not apply excessive force to the top cover when suspending the harmonic filter. The top cover may be deformed. When lifting the module by hand, always use the holding frames and use two people. Failure to comply may damage the module.

Refer to Figure 2-11 and Figure 2-12 for details.

Figure 2-11: Suspension Locations for Harmonic Filter Module

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-14

Figure 2-12: Holding the Harmonic Filter Module

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-15

Harmonic Filter Module Dimensions

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-16

Table 2-8: Dimensions - 230 V Class

Model

HF-2015-D+

HF-2030-D+

HF-2057-D+

HF-2083-D+

HF-2140-D+

HF-2200-D+

HF-2270-D+

HF-2400-D+

Figure

1

1

2

2

2

3

3

3

W

11.42

(290)

11.42

(290)

11.42

(290)

13.78

(350)

8.23

(209)

8.23

(209)

9.13

(232)

10.24

(260)

H

13.7

(348)

13.78

(350)

15.24

(387)

19.69

(500)

6.93

(176)

7.24

(184)

10.43

(265)

11.06

(281)

Dimensions in (mm)

D

13.98

(355)

13.86

(352)

13.86

(352)

14.96

(380)

11.22

(285)

11.61

(295)

11.85

(301)

12.01

(305)

W1

9.84

(250)

10

(254)

10

(254)

11.42

(290)

6.3

(160)

6.3

(160)

7.99

(203)

8.66

(220)

D1

12.36

(314)

12.36

(314)

12.36

(314)

13.78

(350)

9.45

(240)

9.84

(250)

9.72

(247)

10.08

(256)

D2

1.18

(30)

1.06

(27)

1.06

(27)

0.75

(19)

1.54

(39)

1.54

(39)

1.73

(44)

1.54

(39)

d

M6

M10

M10

M10

M6

M8

M8

M10

Wt.

lb (kg)

59.52

(27)

83.78

(38)

94.8

(43)

136.7

(62)

14.33

(6.5)

19.84

(9)

30.86

(14)

35.27

(16)

Table 2-9: Dimensions - 460 V Class

Model

HF-4008-D+

HF-4016-D+

HF-4030-D+

HF-4043-D+

HF-4058-D+

HF-4086-D+

HF-4145-D+

HF-4210-D+

HF-4300-D+

Figure

1

1

2

2

2

3

2

3

3

W

10.24

(260)

11.42

(290)

11.42

(290)

13.78

(350)

13.78

(350)

8.23

(209)

8.23

(209)

9.13

(232)

10.24

(260)

H

11.54

(293)

13.7

(348)

15.16

(385)

19.69

(500)

19.69

(500)

6.93

(176)

7.01

(178)

10.43

(265)

11.54

(293)

Dimensions in (mm)

D

12.01

(305)

13.98

(355)

13.98

(355)

14.96

(380)

14.96

(380)

11.22

(285)

11.61

(295)

11.85

(301)

12.01

(305)

W1

8.66

(220)

9.84

(250)

9.84

(250)

11.42

(290)

11.42

(290)

6.3

(160)

6.3

(160)

7.99

(203)

8.66

(220)

D1

10.08

(256)

12.36

(314)

12.36

(314)

13.78

(350)

13.54

(344)

9.45

(240)

9.84

(250)

9.72

(247)

10.08

(256)

D2

1.54

(39)

1.18

(30)

1.18

(30)

0.75

(19)

0.98

(25)

1.54

(39)

1.54

(39)

1.73

(44)

1.54

(39)

d

M6

M10

M10

M10

M10

M6

M8

M8

M8

Wt.

lb (kg)

41.89

(19)

59.52

(27)

85.98

(39)

141.1

(64)

160.94

(73)

15.43

(7)

19.84

(9)

33.07

(15)

37.48

(17)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-17

Standard Configuration Devices

W

H

D

Input-side AC Reactor 1 - Dimensions

Table 2-10: Dimensions for Input-side AC Reactor 1

Model

230 V

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

--

--

--

--

W

12.60

(320)

15.00

(380)

17.50

(445)

6.30

(160)

8.07

(205)

10.60

(268)

10.60

(268)

13.00

(330)

Dimensions in (mm)

H

13.50

(343)

15.00

(382)

17.20

(436)

5.24

(133)

6.81

(173)

10.80

(275)

11.40

(290)

13.10

(334)

D

8.31

(211)

8.66

(220)

9.45

(240)

4.49

(114)

4.17

(106)

5.75

(146)

6.34

(161)

6.34

(161)

----

----

--

--

--

--

--

--

Model

460 V

4008-D+

4016-D+

4030-D+

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

W

13.00

(330)

12.60

(320)

15.20

(385)

17.70

(450)

6.30

(160)

8.11

(206)

9.45

(240)

10.40

(265)

10.60

(268)

20.10

(510)

22.00

(560)

22.00

(560)

Dimensions in (mm)

H

12.30

(313)

14.40

(366)

15.00

(382)

16.70

(424)

5.24

(133)

6.81

(173)

8.35

(212)

11.40

(290)

11.20

(285)

19.00

(482)

21.60

(549)

21.60

(549)

D

6.34

(161)

8.31

(211)

9.25

(235)

9.45

(240)

4.09

(104)

3.98

(101)

4.96

(126)

6.34

(161)

6.93

(176)

11.80

(300)

12.60

(320)

12.60

(320)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-18

Input-side AC Reactor 2 - Dimensions

Table 2-11: Dimensions for Input-side AC Reactor 2

Model

460 V

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

W

13.00

(330)

15.20

(385)

17.80

(452)

Dimensions in (mm)

H

12.80

(326)

15.00

(382)

21.5

(545)

D

6.93

(176)

8.66

(220)

14.80

(375)

Reactor for Harmonic Filter - Dimensions

Table 2-12: Dimensions for Harmonic Filter Reactor

Model

460 V

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

W

6.42

(163)

7.17

(182)

8.27

(210)

Dimensions in (mm)

H

5.31

(135)

5.91

(150)

7.48

(190)

D

4.21

(107)

4.02

(102)

4.02

(102)

Capacitor for Harmonic Filter - Dimensions

Table 2-13: Dimensions for Harmonic Filter Capacitor

Model

460 V

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

W

17.20

(438)

17.20

(438)

27.40

(695)

Dimensions in (mm)

H

19.80

(502)

23.70

(602)

22.90

(582)

D

5.04

(128)

5.04

(128)

5.04

(128)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-19

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

2-20

This page intentionally left blank.

C h a p t e r

3

Electrical Installation

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-2

This page intentionally left blank.

Standard Connection Diagram

Connect the converter and peripheral devices as shown in Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2. It is possible to set and run the converter via the digital operator without connecting digital I/O wiring. This section does not discuss converter operation.

Refer to Start-Up Programming & Operation on page 4-1 for instructions on operating the converter.

Refer to IMPULSE

®

•G+/VG+ Series 4 Connection Example on page 4-13 for connection with a drive.

WA R N I N G

Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing the converter. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.

N O T I C E

If unsuitable wiring is performed, the converter could be damaged. Implement protection for branches and short-circuits according to all national and local standards.

N O T I C E

The minimum load for the relay outputs M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6 and MA-MB-MC is 10 mA.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-3

<1> NOTICE: When installing a noise filter on the converter power supply, use a reactor-type noise filter (without a capacitor), such as a zero phase reactor, and install it after the MCCB on the power supply side. Do not install a filter with a built-in capacitor as the harmonic components may cause the capacitor to overheat or may damage the capacitor.

<2> Do not use a line longer than 10 m (32.8 ft.) to connect the input-side sAC reactor and the converter.

<3> Use the specified AC reactor and harmonic filter module. Non-specified devices may cause erroneous operation.

<4> Do not use a DC bus line that is longer than 5 m (16.4 ft.) to connect the converter and drive.

<5> NOTICE: When installing a breaker or contactor on the converter side for an emergency shutoff, confirm that the CHARGE indicators on the drive and converter are not lit before closing the breaker or contactor on the converter output (DC) side. If the power supply is turned on while there is a voltage charge, an overcurrent will flow and the device may be damaged. Always confirm that the breaker or contactor on the converter output (DC) side is turned on before applying power to the converter.

<6> Sequence the operation so that the converter starts operation before the drive when power is applied. Sequence the stopping operation to turn off the drive first, then the motor, and finally the converter. Operating the drive without operating the converter or turning off the power supply unit during operation may trigger a converter fault.

<7> Do not connect a power supply to the drive AC power supply terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).

<8> The connections are shown for sequence connections with no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors for the sequence input signals (S1 to

S8). Use jumper S3 to select between Sink mode and Source mode. The default setting is Sink mode.

<9> Multi-function analog outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. They are not intended for use as a feedback-type signal.

Figure 3-1: Standard Connection Diagram (example: model 2083-D+, 2400-D+, 4043-

D+ to 4300-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-4

<1> NOTICE: When installing a noise filter on the converter power supply, use a reactor-type noise filter (without a capacitor), such as a zero phase reactor, and install it after the MCCB on the power supply side. Do not install a filter with a built-in capacitor as the harmonic components may cause the capacitor to overheat or may damage the capacitor.

<2> Do not use a line longer than 10 m (32.8 ft.) to connect the input-side AC reactor and the converter.

<3> Use the specified AC reactor and harmonic filter module. Non-specified devices may cause erroneous operation.

<4> Do not use a DC bus line that is longer than 5 m (16.4 ft.) to connect the converter and drive.

<5> NOTICE: When installing a breaker or contactor on the converter side for an emergency shutoff, confirm that the CHARGE indicators on the drive and converter are not lit before closing the breaker or contactor on the converter output (DC) side. If the power supply is turned on while there is a voltage charge, an overcurrent will flow and the device may be damaged. Always confirm that the breaker or contactor on the converter output (DC) side is turned on before applying power to the converter.

<6> Sequence the operation so that the converter starts operation before the drive when power is applied. Sequence the stopping operation to turn off the drive first, then the motor, and finally the converter. Operating the drive without operating the converter or turning off the power supply unit during operation may trigger a converter fault.

<7> Do not connect a power supply to the drive AC power supply terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).

<8> The connections are shown for sequence connections with no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors for the sequence input signals (S1 to

S8). Use jumper S3 to select between Sink mode and Source mode. The default setting is Sink mode.

<9> Multi-function analog outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. They are not intended for use as a feedback-type signal.

Figure 3-2: Standard Connection Diagram (example: model 4410-D+, 4560-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-5

<1> NOTICE: When installing a noise filter on the converter power supply, use a reactor-type noise filter (without a capacitor), such as a zero phase reactor, and install it after the MCCB on the power supply side. Do not install a filter with a built-in capacitor as the harmonic components may cause the capacitor to overheat or may damage the capacitor.

<2> Do not use a line longer than 10 m (32.8 ft.) to connect the input-side AC reactor and the converter.

<3> Use the specified AC reactor and harmonic filter module. Non-specified devices may cause erroneous operation.

<4> Do not use a DC bus line that is longer than 5 m (16.4 ft.) to connect the converter and drive.

<5> NOTICE: When installing a breaker or contactor on the converter side for an emergency shutoff, confirm that the CHARGE indicators on the drive and converter are not lit before closing the breaker or contactor on the converter output (DC) side. If the power supply is turned on while there is a voltage charge, an overcurrent will flow and the device may be damaged. Always confirm that the breaker or contactor on the converter output (DC) side is turned on before applying power to the converter.

<6> Sequence the operation so that the converter starts operation before the drive when power is applied. Sequence the stopping operation to turn off the drive first, then the motor, and finally the converter. Operating the drive without operating the converter or turning off the power supply unit during operation may trigger a converter fault.

<7> Do not connect a power supply to the drive AC power supply terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).

<8> The connections are shown for sequence connections with no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors for the sequence input signals (S1 to

S8). Use jumper S3 to select between Sink mode and Source mode. The default setting is Sink mode.

<9> Multi-function analog outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. They are not intended for use as a feedback-type signal.

Figure 3-3: Standard Connection Diagram (example: model 41040-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-6

Main Circuit Connection Diagram

Refer to diagrams in this section when wiring the main circuit of the converter. Connections may vary based on converter capacity. The DC power supply for the main circuit also provides power to the control circuit.

N O T I C E

Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “–” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high

DC voltage potential. Improper wiring connections could damage the converter.

2015-D+ to 2057-D+; 4008-D+ to 4030-D+

Figure 3-4: Connecting Main Circuit Terminals

2083-D+, 2140-D+; 4043-D+, 4058-D+, 4086-D+

Figure 3-5: Connecting Main Circuit Terminals

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-7

2200-D+, 2270-D+, 2400-D+; 4145-D+, 4210-D+, 4300-D+

4410-D+, 4560-D+

Figure 3-6: Connecting Main Circuit Terminals

41040-D+

Figure 3-7: Connecting Main Circuit Terminals

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-8

Figure 3-8: Connecting Main Circuit Terminals

Terminal Block Configuration

Refer to the terminal block configuration diagrams in Table 3-1 for the location of the main circuit terminal block.

Table 3-1: Terminal Block Configuration

230 V Class Models

460 V Class Models

Model

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

4008-D+

4016-D+

4030-D+

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

Figure

Figure 3-9

Figure 3-9

Figure 3-10

Figure 3-11

Figure 3-12

Figure 3-13

Figure 3-13

Figure 3-14

Figure 3-9

Figure 3-9

Figure 3-10

Figure 3-11

Figure 3-11

Figure 3-12

Figure 3-12

Figure 3-14

Figure 3-14

Figure 3-15

Figure 3-15

Figure 3-16

Figure 3-9: Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration (Models 2015-D+, 2030-D+,

4008-D+, 4016-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-9

Figure 3-10: Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration (Models 2057-D+, 4030-D+)

Figure 3-11: Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration (Models 2083-D+, 4043-D+,

4058-D+)

Figure 3-12: Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration (Models 2140-D+, 4086-D+,

4145-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-10

Figure 3-13: Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration (Models 2200-D+, 2270-D+)

Figure 3-14: Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration (Models 2400-D+, 4210-D+ to

4300-D+)

Figure 3-15: Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration (Models 4410-D+, 4560-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-11

Figure 3-16: Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration (Model 41040-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-12

Main Circuit Wiring

This section describes the functions, specifications, and procedures required to safely and properly wire the main circuit in the converter.

N O T I C E

Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the converter. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring practices could result in converter malfunction due to loose terminal connections.

Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Table 3-2: Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Terminal

230 V

Class

460 V

Class

R/L1

Model

S/L2

T/L3 r1/ 11

1/ 21 t1/ 31

-

+

Type

2015-D+ to 2400-D+

4008-D+ to 41040-D+

Function

Main circuit power supply input

These are the power supply input terminals that connect to the input reactor.

Power supply voltage detection inputs

These terminals are to detect the power supply voltage order and voltage levels.

Page

3-3

3-3

DC voltage output

For 230 V class: 100 Ω or less

For 460 V class: 10 Ω or less

These terminals output a DC voltage

Grounding terminal

3-3

3-19

Protecting Main Circuit Terminals

Insulation Caps or Sleeves

Use insulation caps or sleeves when wiring the converter with crimp terminals. Take particular care to ensure that the wiring does not touch nearby terminals or the surrounding case.

Insulation Barrier

Insulation barriers are packaged with models 4410-D+ to 41040-D+ to provide added protection between terminals.

Magnetek recommends using the provided insulation barriers to ensure proper wiring. Refer to

Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 for instructions on placement of the insulation barriers.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-13

Figure 3-17: Installing Insulation Barriers

Figure 3-18: Locations of the Insulation Barriers

Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque

Use the tables in this section to select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals.

NOTE: 1. Wire gauge recommendations based on continuous current ratings using 75°C 600

VAC vinyl-sheathed wire assuming ambient temperature within 40°C.

2. Wire gauge recommendations for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 on 4410-D+ to 41040-D+ based on continuous current ratings using 105°C 600 VAC vinyl-sheathed wire assuming ambient temperature within 40°C.

3. Use terminals + and - when connecting the drive to the converter.

• Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:

Line drop voltage (V) = √ 3 × wire resistance ( Ω /km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-

3

• Refer to UL Standards Compliance on page C-16 for information on UL compliance.

The wire gauges listed in Table 3-3 and Table 3-4 are Magnetek recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire gauge selections.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-14

Three-Phase 230 V Class

Table 3-3: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 230 V Class)

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2015-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2030-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2057-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2083-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

12

12

14

10

8

8

14

10

4

4

14

6

2

2

14

4

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

12 to 6

12 to 6

14

16 to 10

8 to 6

8 to 6

14

12 to 10

4 to 1

4 to 1

14

8 to 6

2 to 2/0

2 to 2/0

14 to 10

6 to 4

Screw Size

M4

M4

M3.5

M6

M4

M4

M3.5

M6

M6

M6

M3.5

M6

M8

M8

M4

M8

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

3.6 to 4.0

(31.9 to 35.4)

3.6 to 4.0

(31.9 to 35.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

9.0 to 11

(79.7 to 97.4)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-15

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2140-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2200-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2270-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2400-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

1

3/0 × 2P

3/0 × 2P

14

1/0

300 x 2P

300 x 2P

14

2/0

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

3 x 2P

1/0 x 2P

14

4

3/0 x 2P

3/0 x 2P

14

1 to 1/0

3/0 to 300

3/0 to 300

14 to 10

1/0 to 4/0

300 to 600

300 to 600

14 to 10

2/0 to 4/0

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

3 to 2/0

1/0 to 2/0

14 to 10

4

3/0 to 300

3/0 to 300

14 to 10

Screw Size

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

M10

M12

M12

M4

M8

M8

M4

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-16

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4008-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4016-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4030-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4043-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4058-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

12

12

12

14

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

12

12

14

14

8

6

6

10

8

8

14

6

4

4

14

6

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

12 to 6

12 to 6

14

14 to 12

12 to 6

12 to 16

14

12 to 10

8 to 1

8 to 1

14

10 to 8

6 to 2/0

6 to 2/0

14 to 10

8 to 6

4 to 2/0

4 to 2/0

14 to 10

6

Table 3-4: Three-Phase 460 V Class

Screw Size

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

3.6 to 4.0

(31.9 to 35.4)

3.6 to 4.0

(31.9 to 35.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

9.0 to 11

(79.7 to 97.4)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

(9.7 to 10.6)

9.0 to 11

(79.7 to 97.4)

M6

M4

M4

M3.5

M4

M4

M3.5

M3.5

M6

M8

M8

M6

M6

M6

M4

M8

M8

M8

M4

M8

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-17

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4086-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4145-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4210-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4300-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4410-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

1/0

3/0 to 2P

3/0 x 2P

14

1/0

300 x 2P

300 x 2P

14

2/0

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

2

2

14

6

3 x 2P

1/0 x 2P

14

3

3/0 x 2P

3/0 x 2P

14

1/0 to 2/0

3/0 to 600

3/0 to 600

14 to 10

1/0 to 4/0

300

300

14 to 10

2/0 to 4/0

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

2 to 2/0

2 to 2/0

14 to 10

6

3 to 2/0

1/0 to 2/0

14 to 10

3

3/0 to 600

3/0 to 600

14 to 10

Screw Size

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

M10

M12

M12

M4

M10

M8

M8

M4

M10

M10

M10

M4

M8

M8

M4

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-18

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4560-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

–, +

410140-D+ r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

4/0 x 4P

4/0 x 4P

14

4/0

4/0 x 8P

4/0 x 8P

14

250

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

4/0 to 300

4/0 to 300

14 to 10

2/0 to 300

4/0 to 300

4/0 to 300

14 to 10

2/0 to 300

Screw Size

M12

M12

M4

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

Ground Wiring

Follow the precautions below when wiring the ground for one converter or a series of converters.

WA R N I N G

Electrical Shock Hazard. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire. Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical potentials on equipment chassis, which could result in death or serious injury.

WA R N I N G

Electrical Shock Hazard. Be sure to ground the converter ground terminal (230 V class: ground to 100 Ω or less; 460 V class: ground to 10 Ω or less). Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting ungrounded electrical equipment.

N O T I C E

Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment. Improper equipment grounding could result in converter or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-19

N O T I C E

When using more than one converter, ground multiple converters according to instructions.

Improper equipment grounding could result in abnormal operation of converter or equipment.

N O T I C E

If devices, such as office equipment, that is sensitive to noise are installed in the same location, separate the ground wires and use independent grounds or noise filters to prevent noise from entering the devices through the ground wire. Otherwise, the office equipment may fail.

NOTE: Connect the converters to power supply transformers on a 1:1 basis and use independent grounds. Otherwise the converters or the devices may fail to operate.

NOTE: If other devices are installed in the same location, connect them while observing the grounding standards for each device. Otherwise the converters or the devices may fail to operate.

Refer to Figure 3-19 when using a converter with multiple drives. Do not loop the ground wire.

Figure 3-19: Installation Examples for a Converter and Several Drives

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-20

Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal

WA R N I N G

Electrical Shock Hazard. Shut off the power supply to the converter before wiring the main circuit terminals. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.

Wire the main circuit terminals after the terminal board has been properly grounded.

Main Circuit Connection Diagram

Refer to Main Circuit Connection Diagram on page 3-7 when wiring terminals on the main power circuit of the converter.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-21

Harmonic Filter Module Wiring

This section describes the terminal functions, terminal specifications, and wiring methods to correctly and safely wire converters and harmonic filter modules.

N O T I C E

To comply with the UL compliance, attach crimp terminals to the ends of the cables that connects to the harmonic filter module.

Terminal Configuration

Refer to Figure 3-20 for the terminal arrangements. Refer to Wiring a Harmonic Filter Module on page 3-27 for the procedures to remove the faceplate and top cover.

Figure 3-20: Harmonic Filter Module Terminal Configuration

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-22

Terminal Functions

Table 3-5: Terminal Functions

Terminal

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3 r

Type Function

Main circuit power supply inputs

These terminals are connected to the power supply.

Page

3-3

Y

Z t

X

Power supply voltage detection inputs

These terminals are to detect the power supply voltage order and voltage levels.

Harmonic filter module outputs

These terminals connect to the input-side AC reactor.

3-3

3-3

For 230 V class: 100 Ω or less

For 460 V class: 10 Ω or less

Grounding terminal 3-19

Protecting Circuit Terminals

Insulation Caps or Sleeves

Use insulation caps or sleeves when wiring the module with crimp terminals. Take particular care to ensure that the wiring does not touch nearby terminals or the surrounding case.

Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque

Use the tables in this section to select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals.

NOTE: 1. Wire gauge recommendations based on continuous current ratings using 75°C 600

VAC vinyl-sheathed wire assuming ambient temperature within 40°C.

2. Wire gauge recommendations for models 4410-D+ to 41040-D+ based on continuous current ratings using 105°C 600 VAC vinyl-sheathed wire assuming ambient temperature within 40°C.

Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:

Line drop voltage (V) = √ 3 × wire resistance ( Ω /km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-

3

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-23

Three-Phase 230 V Class

Table 3-6: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 230 V Class)

Model

HF-2015-D+

HF-2030-D+

HF-2057-D+

HF-2083-D+

HF-2140-D+

Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

12

14

4

14

4

14

6

14

10

14

10

8

4

2

3 x 2P

Screw Size

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

2.2 to 2.4

(19.1 to 21.2)

4.0 to 4.9

(35.4 to 43.4)

4.0 to 4.9

(35.4 to 43.4)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

4.0 to 4.9

(35.4 to 43.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

2.2 to 2.4

(19.1 to 21.2)

2.2 to 2.4

(19.1 to 21.2)

2.2 to 2.4

(19.1 to 21.2)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

M8

M8

M4

M8

M6

M6

M4

M6

M8

M8

M4

M8

M5

M5

M6

M5

M4

M4

M4

M5

14

12 to 10

4 to 3/0

4

14

8 to 6

2 to 3/0

2 to 1

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

12 to 8

12

14

16 to 10

8

8

14 to 10

6 to 4

3 to 3/0

3 to 3/0

14 to 10

4

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-24

Model Terminal

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

HF-2200-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

3/0 x 2P

14

1

HF-2270-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

3/0 x 2P

14

1/0

HF-2400-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

300 x 2P

14

2/0

14 to 10

1/0 to 4/0

300

300

14 to 10

2/0 to 4/0

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

3/0 to 300

3/0

14 to 10

1 to 1/0

3/0 to 300

3/0

Screw Size

M12

M12

M4

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

Three-Phase 460 V Class

Table 3-7: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 460 V Class)

Model

HF-4008-D+

Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

12

14

12

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

12 to 8

12

14

14 to 12

Screw Size

M4

M4

M4

M5

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

2.2 to 2.4

(19.1 to 21.2)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-25

Model Terminal

HF-4016-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

HF-4030-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

HF-4043-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

HF-4058-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

HF-4086-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

12

14

10

8

14

8

6

14

6

4

14

6

2

14

6

14

10 to 8

6 to 3/0

6 to 1

14 to 10

8 to 6

4 to 3/0

4 to 1

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

12 to 8

12

14

12 to 10

8 to 3/0

8 to 4

14 to 10

6

2 to 3/0

2 to 3/0

14 to 10

6

Screw Size

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

4.0 to 4.9

(35.4 to 43.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

2.2 to 2.4

(19.1 to 21.2)

4.0 to 4.9

(35.4 to 43.4)

4.0 to 4.9

(35.4 to 43.4)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

M8

M8

M4

M8

M8

M8

M4

M8

M8

M8

M4

M8

M6

M6

M4

M6

M4

M4

M4

M5

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-26

Model Terminal

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

HF-4145-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

3 x 2P

HF-4300-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

14

3

HF-4210-D+

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

X, Y, Z

3/0 x 2P

14

1/0

3/0 x 2P

14

1/0

14 to 10

1/0 to 2/0

3/0

3/0

14 to 10

1/0 to 4/0

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

3 to 3/0

3 to 3/0

14 to 10

3

3/0

3/0

M12

M12

M4

M12

M8

M8

M4

M8

M12

M12

M4

M12

Screw Size

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

Wiring a Harmonic Filter Module

WA R N I N G

Electrical Shock Hazard. Shut off the power supply to the converter before wiring the main circuit terminals. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.

1. Loosen the screws on the faceplate and top cover and remove the faceplate and top cover.

NOTE: 1. The face plate and top cover can be removed by loosening these screws; they do not need to be removed.

2. HF-2015-D+, HF-2030-D+, HF-4008-D+, and HF-4016-D+ have no screws on terminal covers.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-27

Figure 3-21: Removing the Covers

2. Wire the r, , and t terminals.

Figure 3-22: Wiring the r, s, and t Terminals

3. Wire the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 terminals and then wire the X, Y, and Z terminals. Bundle the cables that are connected to the X, Y, and Z terminals and secure them with cable ties.

NOTE: Wire the ground terminal first and then wire the main circuit terminals.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-28

Figure 3-23: Wiring a Harmonic Filter Module

4. Reverse the previous procedure and connect the faceplate and top cover.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-29

Control Circuit Wiring

N O T I C E

Do not connect AC control circuit ground to converter enclosure. Improper converter grounding can cause control circuit malfunction.

<1> The default setting is for Sinking Mode. Control is possible with no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. For details, refer to Digital Input

Sink/Source/External Power Supply Selection on page 3-38.

<2> The maximum output current capacity for the +V and -V terminals on the control circuit is 20 mA. Never short terminals +V, -V, and AC, as it can cause erroneous operation or damage the converter.

<3> Set DIP switch S1 to select between a voltage or current input signal to terminal A2. The default setting is for current input. For details, refer to Terminal A2 Input Signal Selection on page 3-38.

<4> Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position to enable the termination resistor in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.

<5> Monitor outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. They are not intended for use as a feedback-type signal.

Figure 3-24: Control Circuit Wiring

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-30

Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions

Parameters determine which functions apply to the multi-function digital inputs (S1 to S8), multifunction relay outputs (M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6), and multi-function analog monitor outputs (FM,

AM). The default setting is listed next to each terminal name in Table 3-8.

N O T I C E

Install an MC on the power supply side of the converter when the drive should not automatically restart after power loss. To get the full performance life out of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays, refrain from switching the power supply off and on more than once every 30 minutes. Frequent use can damage the converter.

Input Terminals

Table 3-8 lists the input terminals on the converter. Text in parenthesis indicates the default setting for each multi-function input.

Table 3-8: Control Circuit Input Terminals

Type

Multi-Function

DIgital Inputs

No.

Terminal Name (Function)

Function (Signal Level)

Default Setting

S1

S2

S3

Multi-function input 1 (RUN-SB)

Multi-function input 2 (STOP)

Multi-function input 3 (External fault)

Multi-function input 4 (Fault reset) S4

S5 Multi-function input 5 (Reserved)

S6 Multi-function input 6 (Reserved)

S7 Multi-function input 7 (Reserved)

S8

Multi-function input 8 (External

Baseblock)

SC Multi-function input common

SP

Digital input power supply +24

VDC

• Photocoupler

• 24 VDC, 8 mA

• Set the S3 jumper to select between sinking, sourcing mode, and the power supply.

Refer to Control I/O

Connections on page 3-38.

SN Digital input power supply 0 V

24 VDC power supply for digital inputs, 150 mA max (only when not using digital input option DI-

A3)

NOTICE:

Do not jumper or short terminals SP and SN. Failure to comply will damage the converter.

Page

B-11

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-31

Type

Analog Inputs

No.

+V Analog reference input

-V

A1

Analog reference input

Multi-function analog input 1

(Reserved)

A2

A3

Terminal Name (Function)

Multi-function analog input 2

(Reserved)

Multi-function analog input 3

(Reserved)

AC Frequency reference common

E(G)

Ground for shielded lines and option cards

Function (Signal Level)

Default Setting

10.5 VDC (max allowable current

20 mA)

-10.5 VDC (max allowable current

20 mA)

-10 to 10 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC (input impedance: 20 k Ω )

• -10 to 10 VDC, 0 to 10

VDC (input impedance:

20 k Ω )

• 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA

(input impedance: 250 Ω )

• Voltage or current input must be selected by DIP switch S1 and H3-09.

• -10 to 10 VDC, 0 to 10

VDC (input impedance:

20 k Ω )

• Use DIP switch S4 on the terminal board to select between analog and PTC input.

0 V

--

Page

--

--

B-14

B-14

B-14

--

--

Output Terminals

Table 3-9 lists the output terminals on the converter. Text in parenthesis indicates the default setting for each multi-function output.

Table 3-9: Control Circuit Output Terminals

Type

Fault Relay

Output

Multi-Function

Relay Output

<1>

No.

Terminal Name (Function)

Function (Signal Level)

Default Setting

M3

M4

M5

M6

MA N.O. output (Fault)

MB N.C. output (Fault)

MC Fault output common

M1

M2

Multi-function relay output (During

Run 1)

30 VDC, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 VAC,

10 mA to 1 A

Minimum load: 5 VDC, 10 mA

30 VDC, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 VAC,

10 mA to 1 A

Minimum load: 5 VDC, 10 mA

Multi-function relay output (During

MC on)

Multi-function relay output

(Converter Ready)

30 VDC, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 VAC,

10 mA to 1 A

Minimum load: 5 VDC, 10 mA

Page

B-12

B-12

<1> Refrain from assigning functions to digital relay outputs that involve frequent switching, as doing so may shorten relay performance life.

Switching life is estimated at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-32

Type No.

Terminal Name (Function)

Function (Signal Level)

Default Setting

Page

Monitor

Output

FM

AM

Analog monitor output 1 (Power

Supply Side Power)

Analog monitor output 2 (Power

Supply Side Current)

AC Monitor common

-10 to +10 VDC, or 0 to +10 VDC B-15

0 V --

<1> Refrain from assigning functions to digital relay outputs that involve frequent switching, as doing so may shorten relay performance life.

Switching life is estimated at 200,000 times (assumes 1 A, resistive load).

Serial Communication Terminals

Table 3-10: Control Circuit Terminals: Serial Communications

Type

MEMOBUS/

Modbus

Communication

<1>

No.

R+

R-

S+

S-

IG

Signal Name

Communications input

(+)

Communications input

(–)

Communications output (+)

Communications output (–)

Shield ground

Function (Signal Level)

MEMOBUS/Modbus communication: Use an

RS-422 or RS-485 cable to connect the converter.

0 V

RS-422/RS-485

MEMOBUS/Modbus communication protocol

115.2 kbps (max.)

<1> Enable the termination resistor in the last converter in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network by setting DIP switch S2 to the ON position.

Terminal Configuration

The control circuit terminals are arranged as shown in Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25: Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-33

Wire Size and Torque Specifications

Select appropriate wire type and gauges from Table 3-11.

For simpler and more reliable wiring, use crimp ferrules on the wire ends. Refer to Table 3-12 for ferrule terminal types and sizes.

Table 3-11: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications

Terminal

FM, AC, AM,

SC, SP, SN, A1,

A2, A3, +V, -V,

S1 to S8, MA,

MB, MC, M1 to

M6

E(G)

M3.5

M3.5

IG, R+, R-, S+,

S-

Screw

Size

Tightening

Torque

N-m

(lb-in.)

Bare Wire Terminal Ferrule-Type Terminal

Recomm. wire size mm

2

(AWG)

Applicable wire size mm

2

(AWG)

Recomm. wire size mm

2

(AWG)

Applicable wire size mm

2

(AWG)

Wire

Type

M2

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.6)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.6)

0.22 to 0.25

(1.9 to 2.2)

0.75

(18)

1.25

(12)

0.75

(18)

0.5 to 2

(20 to 14)

0.5 to 2

(20 to 14)

Stranded wire:

0.25 to 1.0

(24 to 17)

Solid wire:

0.25 to 1.5

(24 to 16)

--

0.5

(20)

--

0.25 to 0.5

(24 to 20)

Shielded wire, etc.

Ferrule-Type Wire Terminals

Magnetek recommends using CRIMPFOX 6, a crimping tool manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT, to prepare wire ends with insulated sleeves before connecting to the converter. See Table 3-12 for dimensions.

Figure 3-26: Ferrule Dimensions

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-34

Size mm

2

(AWG)

0.25 (24)

0.34 (22)

0.5 (20)

Table 3-12: Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes

Type

AI 0.25–6YE

AI 0.34–6TQ

AI 0.5–6WH

L

(mm)

10.5

10.5

14

d1

(mm)

0.8

0.8

1.1

d2

(mm)

2

2

2.5

Manufacturer

PHOENIX CONTACT

Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal

This section describes the proper procedures and preparations for wiring the control terminals.

WA R N I N G

Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch the circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

N O T I C E

Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/l1, S/l2, T/l3, r1/

11,

1/ 21, t1/ 31, –, +) and other high-power lines. Improper wiring practices could result in converter malfunction due to electrical interference.

N O T I C E

Separate wiring for digital output terminals MA, MB, MC, M1 to M6 from wiring to other control circuit lines. Improper wiring practices could result in converter or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.

N O T I C E

Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals.

Improper application of peripheral devices could result in converter performance degradation due to improper power supply.

N O T I C E

Insulate shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices could result in converter or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-35

N O T I C E

Connect the shield of shielded cable to the appropriate ground terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in converter or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.

Wire the control circuit only after terminals have been properly grounded and main circuit wiring is complete.

Prepare the ends of the control circuit wiring as shown in Figure 3-27. Refer to Figure 3-21 for the treatment of the ends of the shield wire.

N O T I C E

Do not tighten screws beyond the specified tightening torque. Failure to comply may result in erroneous operation, damage to the terminal block, or cause a fire.

N O T I C E

Use shielded twisted-pair cables as indicated to prevent operating faults. Improper wiring practices could result in converter or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.

Connect control wires as shown in Figure 3-27 and Figure 3-28.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-36

Figure 3-27: Terminal Board Wiring Guide

Figure 3-28: Terminal Board Location Inside the Converter

N O T I C E

The analog signal wiring between the converter and the operator station or peripheral equipment should not exceed 50 meters when using an analog signal from a remote source. Failure to comply could result in poor system performance.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-37

Control I/O Connections

Use the wire jumper between terminals SC and SP or SC and SN to select between Sink mode,

Source mode or external power supply for the digital inputs S1 to S8 as shown in Table 3-13

(Default: Sink mode, internal power supply).

NOTE: Never short terminals SP and SN as doing so will damage the converter.

Table 3-13: Digital Input Sink / Source / External Power Supply Selection

Converter Internal Power Supply

(Terminal SN and SP)

External 24 VDC Power Supply

Sinking

Mode

(NPN)

Sourcing

Mode

(PNP)

Terminal A2 Input Signal Selection

Terminal A2 can be used to input either a voltage or a current signal. Select the signal type using switch S1 as explained in Table 3-14. Set parameter H3-09 accordingly as shown in Table 3-15.

Refer to Figure 3-29 for locating switch S1.

To set the DIP switch, use tweezers or a tool with a tip width of approximately 0.8 mm.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-38

Setting

V (left position)

I (right position)

Figure 3-29: DIP Switch S1

Table 3-14: DIP Switch S1 Settings

Description

Voltage input (-10 to +10 V or 0 to 10 V)

Current input (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA): default setting

Table 3-15: Parameter H3-09 Details

Parameter

Code

H3-09

Parameter Name Function Range

Terminal A2 signal level selection

0 0 to 10 VDC

1 -10 to 10 VDC

2 4 to 20 mA

3 0 to 20 mA

Selects the signal level for terminal

A2.

0–3

Using the Contact Outputs

Figure 3-30 illustrates the use of multi-function relay outputs and the fault relay outputs.

Initial

Value

2

<1> Minimum load: 5 VDC, 10 mA

Figure 3-30: Contact Outputs

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-39

Wiring Checklist

No.

Item

Converter, Peripherals, Option Cards

1 Check converter model number to ensure receipt of correct model.

2 Make sure you have the correct peripheral devices.

3 Check the option card model number.

Installation Area and Physical Setup

4

Ensure that the area surrounding the converter complies with specifications.

Power Supply Voltage, Output Voltage

5

The voltage from the power supply should be within the input voltage specification range of the converter.

6 The total load must be within the output specifications of the converter.

7

8

A power supply with a capacity (kVA) that is larger than the rated input capacity of the converter must be used.

The ratings must be correct.

Main Circuit Wiring

9

Confirm proper branch circuit protection as specified by national and local codes.

10 Properly wire the converter.

Page

1-2

--

--

2-3

--

1-3

--

1-3

--

3-9

3-14

3-19

11 Suitable wires must be used to wire the power supply and converter.

12 Properly ground the converter. Review page 3-19.

13

Tighten control circuit and grounding terminal screws.

Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 3-14.

Control Circuit Wiring

14 Use twisted-pair line for all converter control circuit wiring.

15

Ground the shields of shielded wiring to the GND terminal.

16 Properly wire any option cards.

17

18

Check for any other wiring mistakes. Only use a multimeter to check wiring.

Properly fasten converter control circuit terminal screws. Refer to Wire

Size and Torque Specifications on page 3-34.

19 Pick up all wire clippings.

20

Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or connections.

21 Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring.

22

The line between the input-side AC reactor and converter must be 10 m or shorter and the DC bus line between the converter and drive must be

5 m or shorter.

3-14

3-35

3-4

--

--

3-34

--

--

--

--

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

3-40

C h a p t e r

4

Start-Up Programming &

Operation

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-2

This page intentionally left blank.

Using the Digital Operator

Use the digital operator to enter Run and Stop commands, edit parameters, and display data including fault and alarm information.

LCD Display

Figure 4-1: LCD Display

Table 4-1: Display and Contents

No.

1

2

3

4

5

Name

Operation Mode

Menus

Mode Display Area

Ready

Data Display

DC Bus Voltage

Reference

Assignment <1>

Display

MODE

MONITR

VERIFY

PRMSET

SETUP

DRV

PRG

Rdy

--

OPR

AI

COM

OP

Content

Displayed when in Mode Selection.

Displayed when in Monitor Mode.

Indicates the Verify Menu.

Displayed when in Parameter Setting Mode.

Displayed when in Setup Mode.

Displayed when in Drive Mode.

Displayed when in Programming Mode.

Indicates the converter is ready to run.

Displays specific data and operation data.

Displayed when the DC Bus Voltage Reference is assigned to the LCD Operator Option.

Displayed when the DC Bus Voltage Reference is assigned to the Analog Input.

Displayed when the DC Bus Voltage Reference is assigned to the MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication

Inputs.

Displayed when the DC Bus Voltage Reference is assigned to a Option converter.

<1> Displayed when in DC Bus Voltage Reference Mode.

<2> Displayed when in DC Bus Voltage Reference Mode and Monitor Mode.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-3

No.

6

Name

LO/RE Display <2>

Display

RSEQ

LSEQ

RREF

LREF

Content

Displayed when the reference is supplied from a remote source.

Displayed when the reference is supplied from the operator keypad.

Displayed when the frequency reference is supplied from a remote source.

Displayed when the frequency reference is supplied from the operator keypad.

HELP

Pressing displays the Help menu.

Pressing scrolls the cursor to the left.

7 Function Key 1 (F2)

HOME

Pressing returns to the top menu (DC Bus

Voltage Reference).

ESC

DATA

Pressing

Pressing

8 Function Key 2 (F1)

Pressing

RESET Pressing or error.

<1> Displayed when in DC Bus Voltage Reference Mode.

<2> Displayed when in DC Bus Voltage Reference Mode and Monitor Mode.

returns to the previous display.

scrolls to the next display.

scrolls the cursor to the right.

resets the existing converter fault

ALARM (ALM) LED Displays

Table 4-2: ALARM (ALM) LED Status and Contents

State Content Display

Illuminated When the converter detects a fault.

Flashing

Off

• When an alarm occurs.

When oPE is detected

.

Normal operation (no fault or alarm).

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-4

LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications

Table 4-3: LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications

LED Lit

When source of the Run command is assigned to the digital operator (LOCAL)

Flashing

--

Off

When a device other than the operator is selected for Run command control (REMOTE)

During run

Stopped for an operation interlock. <1>

During stop

Examples

<1> The indicator flashes in the following cases:

When REMOTE operation is restored after inputting a Run command from an external terminal during LOCAL operation.

A Run command was input from an external terminal in any mode other than Drive Mode.

The STOP key on the digital operator was pressed during REMOTE operation.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-5

Menu Structure for Digital Operator

<1> Pressing will start the converter operation.

<2> Flashing characters are shown as .

<3> “X” characters are used as examples in this manual. The LCD Operator will display the actual setting values.

<4> The DC Bus Voltage Reference appears after the initial display that shows the product name.

<5> The information that appears on the display will vary depending on the converter.

Figure 4-2: Digital Operator Menu and Screen Structure

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-6

The Drive and Programming Modes

The converter has a Drive Mode and a Programming Mode.

Drive Mode:

In Drive Mode the user can operate the converter, monitor operating status (DC bus voltage, DC current reference, etc.), and change the setting of d8-01. For details, refer to Parameter

Tables on page B-4.

Programming Mode:

In Programming Mode the user can edit and verify parameter settings. When the converter is in Programming Mode it will not accept a Run command unless b1-08 is set to 1.

Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes (Default Setting)

N O T I C E

Check the following items before you turn on the power supply.

• Is the power supply voltage correct?

230 V Class: 190 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz

460 V Class: 380 to 480 VAC 50/60 Hz

• Are the converter and the control devices connected properly (e.g., is the phase order correct)?

• Is the phase order correct between the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) on the converter and the power supply voltage detection terminals (r1/ 11, 1/ 21, t1/ 31).

• Are the control circuit terminals on the converter connected properly to the control devices?

• Are the Run Commands for the converter and the control devices turned off?

The converter is set to operate in Drive Mode when it is first powered up. Switch between display screens by using the and keys.

Drive Mode Details

The following actions are possible in the Drive Mode:

• Run and stop the converter

• Monitor the operation status of the converter (DC bus voltage feedback, Power supply side voltage, Power supply side current, etc.)

• View information on an alarm

• View a history of alarms that have occurred

NOTE: The converter must be in Drive Mode to operate. Change to another mode when the converter is stopped.

Figure 4-3 illustrates how to change the Output Voltage Reference from 600 (600 V) to 700 (700 V) while in the Drive Mode.

This example assumes the converter is set to LOCAL.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-7

Figure 4-3: Setting the DC Bus Voltage Reference while in the Drive Mode

NOTE: The converter will not accept a change to the value of DC bus voltage reference until the

ENTER key is pressed after the value of DC bus voltage reference is entered. This feature prevents accidental setting of the value of DC bus voltage reference.

Programming Mode Details

The following actions are possible in the Programming Mode:

Verify Mode:

View a list of parameters that have been changed from the default values.

Setup Mode:

Access a list of commonly used parameters to simplify setup. Refer to Setup

Group Parameters on page 4-8.

Parameter Setting Mode:

Access and edit all parameter settings.

Setup Group Parameters

Parameters most likely to be changed are assigned to the group of User Parameters, A2-01 through

A2-32. User Parameters are part of the Setup Group, which provides quicker access by eliminating the need to scroll through multiple menus.

Table 4-4 lists the default settings of the A2-xx parameters.

NOTE: Parameter b1-02 is displayed in Setup Mode regardless of A2-xx parameter settings.

Table 4-4: Setup Group Parameters

A2-xx

A2-01

A2-02

A2-03

Default

b1-18 b1-02 d8-01

Name

Voltage Reference Source

Run Command Selection

DC Bus Voltage Reference

Changing Parameter Settings or Values

This example explains changing b1-02 (Run Command Selection) from 01 to 00.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-8

Step

1.

Turn on the power to the converter. The initial display appears.

2.

Press the or key until the Parameter

Setting Mode screen appears.

3.

Press the tree.

key to enter the parameter menu

4.

Press the group.

or key to select the B parameter

5.

Press two times.

6.

Press flashes.

to view the current setting value (1). “1”

7.

Press the key and enter 0.

8.

Press change.

and the converter will confirm the

Display/Result

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-9

Step

9.

The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step 4.

Display/Result

10.

Press the key until back at the initial display.

Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Mode

The Verify Mode lists edited parameters from the Programming Mode. The Verify Mode helps determine which settings have been changed, and is particularly useful when replacing a converter.

If no settings have been changed, the Verify Mode will read “None”. The Verify Mode also allows users to quickly access and re-edit any parameter settings that have been changed.

Step Display/Result

1.

Turn on the power to the converter. The initial display appears.

2.

Press or the Verify Menu.

until the display shows the top of

3.

Press to enter the list of parameters that have been edited from their original default settings.

If parameters other than b1-02 have been changed, use the appears.

or key to scroll until b1-02

4.

Press the key to access the setting value.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-10

Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE

LOCAL mode is when the converter is set to accept the Run command from the digital operator RUN key. REMOTE mode is when the converter is set to accept the Run command from an external device.

Switch the operation between LOCAL and REMOTE using the via a digital input.

key on the digital operator or

NOTE: 1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit.

2. The converter will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run.

Using the LO/RE Key on the Digital Operator

Display/Result Step

1.

Turn on the power to the converter. The initial display appears.

2.

Press . The LO/RE light will light up. The converter is now in LOCAL. To set the converter for

REMOTE operation, press the key again.

Using Input Terminals S1 through S8 to Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE

It is possible to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE modes using one of the digital input terminals

S1 through S8 (set the corresponding parameter H1-xx to “1”).

Setting H1-xx to 1 disables the LO/RE key on the digital operator.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-11

Powering Up the Converter

Powering Up the Converter and Operation Status Display

Powering Up the Converter

Review the following checklist before turning the power on.

Item to Check

Power supply voltage

Converter output terminals and drive terminals

Control circuit terminals

Converter control terminal status

Input-side AC reactor and harmonic filter (harmonic filter module) connections to converter

Description

Check the power supply voltage.

230 V class: Three-phase 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz

460 V class: Three-phase 380 to 480 VAC 50/60 Hz

Properly wire the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).

Properly wire the phase order of the power supply input terminals (R/

L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and the power supply voltage detection terminals

(1/ 11, 1/ 21, 31).

Check for proper grounding of converter.

Properly connect the DC voltage output terminals (+/–) on the converter to the DC power supply input terminals (+/–) on the drive. Be particularly careful to correctly connect the + and – terminals.

Properly connect the control circuit terminals on the converter to other control devices.

Turn off the Run Commands for the converter and the peripheral control devices.

Properly connect the AC reactor and harmonic filter (harmonic filter module) to converter as shown in the Standard Connection Diagram.

Status Display

When the power supply to the converter is turned on, the digital operator lights will appear as follows:

Status Name Description

Normal

Operation

The data display area displays the DC bus voltage reference

DC voltage feedback. is lit.

Fault

Example: External Fault

Data displayed varies by the type of fault. Refer to

Troubleshooting on page 5-1 for more information.

are lit.

and

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-12

Operation with the Drive Connected

IMPULSE

®

•G+/VG+ Series 4 Connection Example

<1> NOTICE: When installing a noise filter on the converter power supply, use a reactor-type noise filter (without a capacitor), such as a zero phase reactor, and install it after the MCCB on the power supply side. Do not install a filter with a built-in capacitor as the harmonic components may cause the capacitor to overheat or may damage the capacitor.

<2> Do not use a line longer than 10 m (32.8 ft.) to connect the input-side AC reactor and the converter.

<3> Use the specified AC reactor and harmonic filter module. Non-specified devices may cause erroneous operation.

<4> Do not use a DC bus line that is longer than 5 m (16.4 ft.) to connect the converter and drive.

<5> NOTICE: When installing a breaker or contactor on the converter side for an emergency shutoff, confirm that the CHARGE indicators on the drive and converter are not lit before closing the breaker or contactor on the converter output (DC) side. If the power supply is turned on while there is a voltage charge, an overcurrent will flow and the device may be damaged. Always confirm that the breaker or contactor on the converter output (DC) side is turned on before applying power to the converter.

<6> Sequence the operation so that the converter starts operation before the drive when power is applied. Sequence the stopping operation to turn off the drive first, then the motor, and finally the converter. Operating the drive without operating the converter or turning off the power supply unit during operation may trigger a converter fault.

<7> Do not connect a power supply to the drive AC power supply terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).

<8> The connections are shown for sequence connections with no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors for the sequence input signals (S1 to

S8). Use jumper S3 to select between Sink mode and Source mode. The default setting is Sink mode.

<9> For information on an interlock with the drive, refer to Interlock with the Drive on page 4-15.

Figure 4-4: Standard Connection Diagram with G+/VG+ Series 4 (Example for 2083-

D+, 2400-D+, and 4043-D+ to 4300-D+)

NOTE: For information on connecting other control circuit I/O terminals, refer to the Quick Start

Guide for the drive that is connected to the converter.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-13

WA R N I N G

Sudden Movement Hazard. Suitably wire the circuits to start and stop operation and the safety circuits to ensure a suitable status when the power supply to the converter is turned on.

Failure to comply could result in sudden machine operation, which could result in death or serious injury.

Timing Chart for Turning the Power Supply On and Off

Figure 4-5 is a timing chart for turning the power supply on and off.

Figure 4-5: Timing Chart for Power ON and Run Command Sequence

Observe the following precautions when you perform operation with the converter connected to the drive.

• After turning on the power supply to the converter, wait for the converter ready signal on the multi-function contact output to turn on and then input the Run Command for the converter.

• Confirm that the converter is operating (i.e., confirm that During Run 1 is on) and then turn on the Run Command for the drive.

• To stop the converter, turn off the Run Command to the drive, confirm that the motor has stopped, and then input the Stop Command.

• Wait for the converter to stop and the During Run 1 multi-function contact output to turn off, then turn off the power supply.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-14

Interlocks

Interlock with the Drive

An interlock is required between the converter and the drive to stop the drive with a fault signal from the converter. It is also necessary to provide a suitable time to restart the drive if it will be restarted for momentary power losses.

Restarting can be timed with the “During MC on” signal that is output from a control terminal of the converter. Create a sequence to turn off the output from the drive with an external base block input to the drive or by a similar means when the terminal that is set for the “During MC on” signal opens.

The drive should be operated only when the converter is operating. The M1-M2 terminals (During

Run 1) will confirm that the converter is operating, and the drive should be operated only when the

During Run 1 signal is on. Stop the drive if the During Run 1 signal turns off.

Not Restarting Operation for Momentary Power Loss (Stopping Operation When a Momentary

Power Loss Is Detected)

Connect the “During MC on” signal from the converter to a multi-function contact input terminal on the drive that is assigned to an external fault.

Use an N.C. input for the external fault input on the drive and set the drive to detect external faults only during operation to prevent an external fault from being detected when the power supply is turned on.

Restarting the System for Momentary Power Losses

• G/VG+ Series 4

Connect the “During MC on” signal from the converter to a multi-function contact input terminal on the drive that is assigned to a Baseblock Command (N.C.).

• Control Devices Other Than the G+/VG+ Series 4

Connect the “During MC on” signal from the converter to a multi-function contact input terminal on the drive that is assigned to External Search Command 2.

(Contact your Magnetek representative if you are using a Magnetek drive that does not have

External Search Command 2.)

Stopping the Converter for Faults in Peripheral Devices

If an external device fails or a fault occurs, the fault contact output on the converter is activated to stop operation. To use an external fault, set H1-xx (terminal S1 to S8 function selection) to one of the values from Table 4-5.

When an external fault is input, EFx is displayed on the digital operator. The x in EFs is the number of the terminal where the external fault signal was input.

Example: If an external fault signal is input to the S3 terminal, EF3 is displayed.

Select the number to set for H1-xx according to the combination of the following three conditions:

• Use an input contact for a signal from the peripheral device.

• Use detection of an external fault.

• Stop operation (as the operation selection when an external fault is detected).

Table 4-5 shows the relationship between the combination of conditions and the set value of H1-xx.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-15

Table 4-5: Combination of Conditions

Input contact <1> Detection <2> Operation selection

Setting Value

N.O. Contact N.C. Contact Always detect

Detect only during operation

Stop converter

(fault)

Continue

Operation

(minor fault

24

25

26

27

2C

2D

2E

2F

<1> When using an input contact, set whether to detect a fault when the signal opens or closes. (N.O.: External fault when closed, N.C.: External fault when open)

<2> When using detection of a fault, set whether to always detect faults or to detect them only during operation.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-16

Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes

Use the Verify Mode to check all changes to parameter settings. Refer to Verifying Parameter

Changes: Verify Mode on page 4-10.

Save the verified parameter settings. Change the access level or set a password to the converter to prevent accidental modification of parameter settings.

Backing Up Parameter Values: o2-03

Setting o2-03 to 1 saves all parameter settings to the converter internal memory. The converter can now recall all the saved parameters by performing a User Initialization (A1-03 = 1110).

Parameter

Code

o2-03

Parameter Name

A1-03

Function

User Defaults Lets the user create a set of default settings for a User

Initialization.

0 Saved/Not Set

1

2

Set Defaults

Clear All

Initialize Parameters

Saves current parameter settings as the default values for a User

Initialization.

Clears the currently saved user settings. After saving the user parameter set value, the items of

1110 (User Initialization) are displayed in A1-03 (User

Parameter Default Value).

Selects a method to initialize the parameters.

0 No Initialize

1110User Initialization

The user must first program and store desired settings using parameter o2-03.

22202-Wire

Initialization

Parameter initialized prior to shipment

5550oPE4 Fault Reset

oPE4 Fault reset

Range

0–2

Initial

Value

0

0, 1110, 2220, 5550 0

Parameter Access Level: A1-01

Setting the Access Level for “Operation only” (A1-01 = 0) allows the user to access parameters A1xx and Ux-xx only.

Other parameters are not displayed.

Setting the Access Level for “User Parameters” (A1-01 = 1) allows the user to access only the parameters that have been previously saved as User Parameters. This is helpful when displaying only the relevant parameters for a specific application.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-17

Parameter

Code

A1-01

Parameter Name

A2-01 to

A2-32

A2-33

Function Range

Access Level Selection Selects which parameters are accessible via the digital operator.

0 Operation only

Operation only. A1-01, A1-04, and

A1-06 can be set and monitored, and UX-XX parameters can also be viewed.

1 User Parameters

Only recently changed parameters from application parameters A2-01 to A2-16 and A2-17 to A2-32 can be set and monitored.

2 Advanced Access

Level

User Parameters 1 to

32

All parameters can be set and monitored.

Parameters selected by the user are saved as User Parameters, including recently viewed parameters and parameters specifically selected for quick access.

If parameter A2-33 is set to 1, recently viewed parameters will be listed between A2-17 and A2-32.

Parameters A2-01 through A2-16 must be manually selected by the user.

If A2-33 is set to 0, recently viewed parameters will not be saved to the group of User Parameters.

A2-XX parameters are now available for manual programming.

User Parameter

Automatic Selection

0

1

Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a group of User Parameters.

Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will be saved to A2-17 through A2-32 for quick access.

The most recently changed parameter is saved to A2-17. The second most recently changed parameter is saved to A2-18, etc.

0–2

A1-00 to o4-19

0, 1

Initial

Value

0

--

0

Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05

The user can set a password in parameter A1-05 to restrict access to the converter. The password must be entered to A1-04 to unlock parameter access (i.e., parameter setting A1-04 must match the value programmed into A1-05). The following parameters cannot be viewed or edited until the value entered to A1-04 correctly matches the value set to A1-05: A1-01, A1-03, and A2-01 through A2-33.

NOTE: Parameter A1-05 is hidden from view. To display A1-05, access parameter A1-04 and press and simultaneously.

Copy Function

Parameter settings can be copied to another converter to simplify parameter restoration or multiple converter setup. The converter supports the following copy options:

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-18

LCD Operator (standard in all models)

The LCD operator used to operate the converter supports copying, importing, and verifying parameter settings. Refer to o3: Copy Function on page B-22 for details.

LED Operator

The optional LED operator also supports copying, importing, and verifying parameter settings.

Refer to the manual supplied with the LED operator for instructions.

USB Copy Unit and CopyUnitManager

The copy unit is an external option connected to the converter to copy parameter settings from one converter and save those settings to another converter. Refer to the manual supplied with the USB Copy Unit for instructions.

NOTE: Connect the USB Copy Unit to the RS-422/RS-485 communication port on the converter.

CopyUnitManager is a PC software tool. It allows the user to load parameter settings from the Copy

Unit onto a PC, or from the PC onto a Copy Unit. This is useful when managing parameters for various converters or applications. Refer to the manual supplied with CopyUnitManager for instructions.

Copying Procedure for the LCD Operator

The LCD operator can perform the following operations by changing the o3-01(Copy Function

Selection) parameter in the converter.

Read (o3-01 = 1)

Copies all parameters from the converter to the LCD operator.

NOTE: There is a limit to the number of read operations that you can perform from the LCD operator. As a guide, do not perform more than 100,000 read operations.

Copy (o3-01 = 2)

Copies all parameters from the LCD operator to the converter.

Verify (o3-01 = 3)

Compares the parameters in the converter with the parameter settings saved on the LCD operator for matches.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-19

Test Run Checklist

Review the checklist before performing a test run. Check each item that applies.

No.

Checklist

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8

Thoroughly read the manual before performing a test run.

Check the Wiring Checklist on page 3-40.

Set the correct power supply voltage.

Turn on the power supply to the converter and drive.

Correctly sequence the Run commands.

The should light after giving a Run command.

To give Run command and DC bus voltage reference from the digital operator, press key to set to LOCAL.

To give Run command and DC bus voltage reference from the control circuit terminals, press the key to set REMOTE. (The LO/RE indicator is lit off while REMOTE is set.)

Page

4-14

--

4-3,

4-11

--

3-40

4-12

4-12

4-11

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

4-20

C h a p t e r

5

Troubleshooting

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-2

This page intentionally left blank.

Alarms, Faults, and Errors

Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors

Check the digital operator for information about possible faults if the converter fails to operate.

If problems occur that are not covered in this manual, contact the nearest Magnetek representative with the following information:

• Converter model

• Software version

• Date of purchase

• Description of the problem

Table 5-1 contains descriptions of the various types of alarms, faults, and errors that may occur while operating the converter.

If the converter fails, contact your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Table 5-1: Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors

Faults

Type

Minor Faults and Alarms

Operation Errors

Copy Function Errors

Response

When the converter detects a fault:

• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is reset.

• The fault interrupts converter output.

• Some faults allow the user to select the stopping method when the fault occurs.

• Fault output terminals MA-MC will close, and MB-MC will open.

• The converter will remain inoperable until the fault is cleared. Refer to Fault

Reset Methods on page 5-31.

When the converter detects an alarm or a minor fault:

• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific alarm or minor fault, and the ALM indicator LED flashes.

• A multi-function contact output set to be tripped by a minor fault (H2-XX =

10) closes. If the output is set to be tripped by an alarm, the contact will not close.

Remove the cause of the problem to reset a minor fault or alarm.

An operation error occurs when parameter settings conflict or do not match hardware settings (such as with an option card). When the converter detects an operation error:

• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error.

• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.

The converter will not operate until the error has been reset. Correct the settings that caused the operation error to clear the error.

Copy Function Errors occur when using the digital operator or the USB Copy

Unit to copy, read, or verify parameter settings.

• The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error.

• Multi-function contact outputs do not operate.

Pressing any key on the digital operator will clear the fault. Investigate the cause of the problem (such as model incompatibility) and try again.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-3

Alarm and Error Displays

Faults

Table 5-2 gives an overview of possible fault codes. Conditions such as overvoltages can trip faults and alarms. It is important to distinguish between faults and alarms to determine the proper corrective actions. When the converter detects a fault, the ALM indicator LED lights, the fault code appears on the digital operator, and the fault contact MA-MB-MC triggers. An alarm is present if the

ALM LED blinks and the fault code on the digital operator flashes. Refer to Minor Faults and Alarms on page 5-6 for a list of alarm codes.

Digital Operator

LED

Display

LCD

Aov

AUv bUS

CE

CoF

Name

Table 5-2: Fault Displays

Page

Digital Operator

LED

Display

LCD

FUA Power Supply Overvoltage 5-9

Power Supply

Undervoltage

Option Communication

Error

MEMOBUS/Modbus

Communication Error

Current Offset Fault

5-9

5-9

5-10

5-10

FUd

GF nSE oC

Name

AC Fuse Blowout

DC Fuse Blowout

Ground Fault

Node Setup Error

Overcurrent

Page

5-13

5-13

5-14

5-14

5-14

CPF00,

CPF01

Control Circuit Error 5-10 oFA00 to oFA43

Option Card Connection

Error (CN5-A)

5-15

CPF02 A/D Conversion Error 5-10 oFb00 to oFb17

Option Card Fault (CN5-B) 5-15

CPF03

Control Board Connection

Error

5-11

CPF06

CPF07

CPF08

EEPROM Memory Data

Error

Terminal Board

Connection Error

Terminal Board

Connection Error

5-11

5-11

5-11

CPF11 to

CPF22

Control Circuit Error 5-10 oFC00 to oFC55 oH oH1 oL2 oPr

Option Card Fault (CN5-C) 5-16

Heatsink Overheat

Heatsink Overheat

Converter Overload

5-17

5-17

5-17

Operator Connection Fault 5-17

CPF23

CPF24

Control Board Connection

Error

Converter Unit Signal

Fault

5-11

5-11 ov

PF2

Overvoltage

Input Power Supply Fault

5-18

5-18

CPF26 to

CPF35

Control Circuit Error 5-10 PF3

Input Phase Loss

Detection

5-18

E5

MECHATROLINK-II

Watchdog Timer Error

5-12

Option Card External Fault 5-12

SC

IGBT Short Circuit or

Ground Fault

Phase Order Fault

5-18

EF0 SrC 5-18

<1> Displayed as CPF00 when occurring at converter power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully starting the converter, the display will show CPF01. Displayed as CPF20 when occurring at converter power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully starting the converter, the display will show CPF21.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-4

Digital Operator

LED

Display

LCD

Name Page

Digital Operator

LED

Display

LCD

Name Page

EF1 to EF8

External Fault (input terminal S1 to S8)

5-12 Uv1 Main Circuit Undervoltage 5-19

Err EEPROM Write Error 5-12 Uv2

Control Power Supply

Undervoltage

5-19

Soft Charge Circuit Fault 5-19 FAn Internal Fan Fault 5-13 Uv3

Fdv

Power Supply Frequency

Fault

5-13 vrE Resonance Detection 5-20

<1> Displayed as CPF00 when occurring at converter power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully starting the converter, the display will show CPF01. Displayed as CPF20 when occurring at converter power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully starting the converter, the display will show CPF21.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-5

Minor Faults and Alarms

Refer to Table 5-3 for an overview of possible alarm codes. Conditions such as overvoltages can trip faults and alarms. It is important to distinguish between faults and alarms to determine the proper corrective actions. When the converter detects an alarm, the ALM indicator LED blinks and the alarm code display flashes. Most alarms trigger a digital output programmed for alarm output (H2-xx = 10).

A fault (not an alarm) is present if the ALM LED lights without blinking.

Refer to Faults on page 5-4 for information on fault codes.

Table 5-3: Minor Fault and Alarm Displays

Digital Operator

Display

LED LCD

Name

AEr Station Number Setting Error

Aov Power Supply Overvoltage

AUv Power Supply Undervoltage bb Converter Baseblock bUS Option Card Communications Error

CALL Serial Communication Transmission Error

CE MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error

CoF Current Offset Fault

CrST Cannot Reset

EF0 Option Card External Fault

Minor Fault Output

(H2-xx = 10)

YES

Page

5-21

YES

YES

No output

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

5-21

5-21

5-21

5-22

5-22

5-23

5-23

5-23

5-23

EF1 to

EF8

External Fault (input terminal S1 to S8)

FAn Converter Internal Fan Fault

Fdv Power Supply Frequency Fault

HCA Current Alarm

LT-1 Cooling Fan Maintenance Time

LT-2 Capacitor Maintenance Time

LT-3 Capacitor Maintenance Time oH Heatsink Overheat oL2 Converter Overheat ov Overvoltage

PAUv Power Supply Undervoltage Pre-alarm

PF3 Input Phase Loss Detection

SE MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault

* Output when H2-xx = 2F.

YES

YES

YES

YES

No output <1>

No output <1>

No output <1>

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

5-24

5-25

5-25

5-25

5-26

5-24

5-24

5-25

5-25

5-26

5-26

5-26

5-26

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-6

Digital Operator

Display

LED LCD

SrC Phase Order Fault

Uv Undervoltage vrE Resonance Detection

* Output when H2-xx = 2F.

Name

Operation Errors

Minor Fault Output

(H2-xx = 10)

YES

YES

YES

Page

5-27

5-27

5-27

Table 5-4: Operation Error Displays

Digital Operator Display

LED LCD

Err oPE01 oPE02 oPE03 oPE04 oPE05 oPE07 oPE30

Name

EEPROM Write Error

Converter Capacity Setting Error

Parameter Setting Range Error

Multi-Function Input Setting Error

Terminal Board Mismatch Error

Run Command Selection Error

Multi-Function Analog Input Selection Error

Incorrect Input Voltage Adjustment

Page

5-28

5-28

5-28

5-28

5-29

5-29

5-29

5-29

Errors and Displays When Using the Copy Function

Table 5-5: Copy Errors

Digital Operator Display

LED LCD

CoPy

CPyE

CSEr dFPS

End iFEr ndAT rdEr rEAd vAEr vFyE

Name

Writing parameter settings (flashing)

Error writing data

Copy unit error

Converter model mismatch

Task complete

Communication error

Model, voltage class, capacity mismatch

Error reading data

Reading parameter settings (flashing)

Voltage class, capacity mismatch

Parameter setting mismatch

Page

5-30

5-30

5-30

5-30

5-30

5-30

5-30

5-30

5-30

5-30

5-30

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-7

Digital Operator Display

LED LCD

vrFy

Name

Comparing parameter settings (flashing)

Page

5-30

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-8

Fault Detection

Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Table 5-6: Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

Aov Power Supply Overvoltage

Cause

The input power supply voltage is too high.

The input power supply voltage became equal to or higher than the

Input Power Supply Overvoltage Detection Level (L8-36).

230 V Class: Approx. 277 VAC

460 V Class: Approx. 554 VAC

Possible Solution

Reduce the voltage to within the range in the power supply specifications.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

AUv Power Supply Undervoltage

The input power supply voltage became equal to or lower than the

Input Power Supply

Undervoltage Detection Level.

230 V Class: Approx. 150 VAC

460 V Class: Approx. 300 VAC

Cause

The capacity of the power supply is too small.

The AC fuse burned out.

The distortion in the power supply is too large.

A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.

Possible Solution

Increase the capacity of the power supply.

A transistor inside the converter was destroyed.

The input wiring is ground-faulted or short-circuited.

Or, the drive output is ground-faulted or short-circuited, which destroyed the output transistor.

* Consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Lower the impedance of the input power supply wiring.

Check the input power supply for phase loss or an imbalance in the interphase voltages. Investigate and correct the cause and then reset the fault.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

bUS Option Communication Error

The connection was lost after establishing initial communication.

Only detected when the run command frequency reference is assigned to an option card.

Cause Possible Solution

No signal was received from the PLC.

Faulty communications wiring or an existing short circuit.

Check for faulty wiring.

Correct the wiring.

Check for disconnected cables and short circuits and repair as needed.

Communication data error occurred due to noise.

Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.

• Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.

Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge absorbers if necessary.

Use only recommended cables or other shielded line.

Ground the shield on the controller side or the converter input power side.

Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines.

Install an EMC noise filter to the converter power supply input.

The option card is damaged.

The option card is not properly connected to the converter.

Replace the option card if there are no problems with the wiring and the error continues to occur.

The connector pins on the option card do not line up properly with the connector pins on the converter.

• Reinstall the option card.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-9

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

CE

MEMOBUS/Modbus

Communication Error

Control data was not received for the CE detection time set to H5-09.

Cause Possible Solution

Faulty communications wiring or an existing short circuit.

Check for faulty wiring.

• Correct the wiring.

• Check for disconnected cables and short circuits and repair as needed.

Communication data error occurred due to noise.

Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.

Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.

Use only recommended cables or other shielded line.

Ground the shield on the controller side or the converter input power side.

Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge suppressors if required.

Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines.

Install an EMC noise filter to the converter power supply input.

Digital Operator

Fault Name Details

Display

CoF Current Offset Fault

A fault occurred in adjustment of the automatic current offset when the power supply was turned on.

Cause

An error occurred in the power supply detection circuit.

Possible Solution

Cycle the power supply and check operation.

* If the fault occurs again, replace the board or converter. For information on board replacement, consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

CPF00,

CPF01 <1>

CPF11 to

PF22 <1>

Control Circuit Error A fault occurred in the control circuit.

CPF26 to

CPF35

Cause

There is a self-diagnostic error in the control circuit.

Possible Solution

Cycle power to the converter.

If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

Replace the operator.

Connector on the operator is damaged.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name

CPF02 A/D Conversion Error

Details

An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred.

Cause Possible Solution

Control circuit is damaged.

Cycle power to the converter.

* If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-10

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

CPF03

Cause

There is a connection error.

Control Board Connection

Error

Connection error between the control board and the converter.

Converter fails to operate properly due to noise interference.

Possible Solution

Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the converter.

* If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.

• Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.

Use only recommended cables or other shielded line.

Ground the shield on the controller side or the converter input power side.Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge suppressors if required.

Separate all communication wiring from converter power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the converter power supply input.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name

CPF06

EEPROM Memory Data

Error

Cause

Details

Error in the data saved to EEPROM

There is an error in EEPROM control circuit.

Possible Solution

Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the converter.

* If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

The power supply was switched off while parameters were being saved to the converter.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name

Re-initialize the converter (A1-03 = 2220, 3330).

Details

CPF07

Terminal Board Connection

Error

There is a faulty connection in the removable terminal block.

CPF08

Cause

There is a faulty connection between the terminal board and the control board.

Possible Solution

Turn off the power and reconnect the terminal board.

If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

CPF23

Control Board Connection

Error

Connection error between the control board and the converter.

Hardware is damaged.

Cause Possible Solution

Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the converter.

* If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

CPF24 Converter Signal Fault

The converter capacity cannot be detected correctly (converter capacity is checked when the converter is powered up).

Cause Possible Solution

Hardware is damaged.

If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-11

Digital Operator

Display

E5

Fault Name

MECHATROLINK-II

Watchdog Timer Error

Cause

Data has not been received from the PLC.

Details

The watchdog timed out.

Possible Solution

Execute DISCONNECT or ALM_CLR, then issue a CONNECT command or SYNC_SET command and proceed to phase 3. Refer to the SI-T3 Option Technical Manual for more details on troubleshooting.

Digital Operator

Display

EF0

Fault Name Details

Option Card External Fault An external fault condition is present.

Cause

An external fault was received from the PLC and F6-03 is set to a value other than 3.

Problem with the PLC program

Digital Operator

Possible Solution

Remove the cause of the external fault.

Remove the external fault input from the PLC.

Check the PLC program and correct problems.

Fault Name Details

Display

EF1

External Fault

(input terminal S1)

External fault at multi-function input terminal S1.

EF2

EF3

EF4

EF5

EF6

EF7

External Fault

(input terminal S2)

External Fault

(input terminal S3)

External Fault

(input terminal S4)

External Fault

(input terminal S5)

External Fault

(input terminal S6)

External Fault

(input terminal S7)

EF8

External Fault

(input terminal S8)

Cause

An external device tripped an alarm function.

External fault at multi-function input terminal S2.

External fault at multi-function input terminal S3.

External fault at multi-function input terminal S4.

External fault at multi-function input terminal S5.

External fault at multi-function input terminal S6.

External fault at multi-function input terminal S7.

External fault at multi-function input terminal S8.

Wiring is incorrect.

Multi-function contact input setting is incorrect.

Possible Solution

Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the fault.

• Properly connect the signal lines to the terminals assigned for external fault detection (H1-xx = 20 to 2B).

• Reconnect the signal line.

Check for unused terminals set for H1-xx = 20 to 2B

(External Fault).

Change the terminal settings.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

Err EEPROM Write Error Data cannot be written to the EEPROM.

Cause

Electrical noise has corrupted data while writing to the

EEPROM.

Possible Solution

Press “ENTER” on the digital operator.

Correct the parameter setting.

Cycle power to the converter.

Hardware problem.

If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-12

Digital Operator

Display

FAn

Fault Name

Internal Fan Fault

Details

Fan or magnetic contactor failure.

Cause

Internal cooling fan has malfunctioned.

Fault detected in the internal cooling fan or magnetic contactor to the power supply.

Possible Solution

Cycle power to the converter.

Check for fan operation.

Verify the cumulative operation time of the fan with monitor U4-03, and verify the cumulative operation time of the fan maintenance timer with U4-04.

If the cooling fan has exceeded its expected performance life or is damaged in any other way, replace the cooling fan.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

Fdv

Power Supply Frequency

Fault

The input power supply frequency exceeded the allowable frequency fluctuation.

Cause Possible Solution

A momentary power loss occurred.

An input power supply wiring terminal is loose.

The fluctuation in the voltage of the input power supply is too large.

Investigate and correct the cause and then reset the fault. Refer to

Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 5-31.

The AC power supply fuse burned out.

• A transistor inside the converter was destroyed.

• The input wiring or drive output has ground faulted or short circuited.

→ Contact your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

FUA AC Fuse Blowout The power supply fuse burned out.

Cause

The power supply fuse burned out.

Possible Solution

A transistor inside the converter was destroyed.

The input wiring or drive output has ground faulted or short circuited.

→ Contact your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Digital Operator

Display

FUd

Fault Name

DC Fuse Blowout

Details

The DC converter output fuse burned out.

Cause Possible Solution

The main transistor failed.

The DC circuit fuse burned out.

Replace the converter.

The drive failed.

Replace the drive.

For information on drive replacement, consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-13

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

GF Ground Fault

A current that exceeded the Ground Short Detection Level was detected at the power supply side of the converter.

Cause

A damaged cable is creating a short circuit.

Check the cable.

Remove the short circuit and reapply power to the converter.

Check the resistance between the cable and the

ground terminal.

Replace the cable.

Excessive leakage current at the drive output.

Hardware problem.

Reduce the amount of stray capacitance.

If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

The wiring of the power supply voltage detection circuits

(r1/ 11, 1/ 31) and the wiring of the

Correct the wiring.

main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) is not correct.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name

Possible Solution

Details

nSE Node Setup Error A terminal assigned to the node setup function closed during run.

Cause

The node setup terminal closed during run.

A Run command was issued while the node setup function was active.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name

Possible Solution

Stop the converter when using the node setup function.

Details

oC

Cause

Overcurrent

One of the cables has shorted out or there is a grounding problem.

Converter sensors detected an output current greater than the specified overcurrent level.

Possible Solution

Check the motor cables.

Remove the short circuit and reapply power to the converter.

Check the resistance between the motor cables and the

The load is too heavy.

Converter fails to operate properly due to noise interference.

• ground terminal .

Replace damaged cables.

Measure the current flowing into the converter.

Replace the converter with a larger capacity converter if the current value exceeds the rated current.

Determine if there is sudden fluctuation in the current level.

Reduce the load to avoid sudden changes in the current level or switch to a larger converter.

Review the possible solutions provided for handling noise interference.

Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring.

The wiring of the power supply voltage detection circuits

(r1/ 11, 1/ 31) and the wiring of the

Correct the wiring.

main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) is not correct.

The voltage on the power supply side is very low.

Check the wiring.

• Correct the wiring.

Check the load on the power supply of peripheral devices that are connected to the same power supply line.

• Reduce the load.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-14

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

oFA00

Option Card Connection

Error at Option Port CN5-A

Option compatibility error.

Cause Possible Solution

The option card installed into port CN5-A is incompatible with the converter.

Check if the converter supports the option card to be installed.

Contact Magnetek for assistance.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

oFA01

Option Card Fault at Option

Port CN5-A

Option not properly connected.

Cause

The option card connection to port CN5-A is faulty.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name

oFA02

Possible Solution

Turn off the power and reconnect the option card.

Details

Same Type of Option Card

Already Connected

The combination of the option cards that are connected is not correct.

Cause Possible Solution

The same option cards or the same type of option cards are connected to CN5-A, CN5-B, and CN5-C.

Connect the option cards correctly.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

oFA05 to oFA06

Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-A oFA10, oFA11

There is a fault in the option card.

oFA12 to oFA17

Option Card Connection

Error (CN5-A) oFA30 to oFA43

Communication Option Card

Connection Error (CN5-A)

Cause

Option card or hardware is damaged.

Possible Solution

Cycle power to the converter.

If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

oFb00

Option Card Fault at Option

Port CN5-B

Option compatibility error.

Cause Possible Solution

The option card installed into port CN5-B is incompatible with the converter.

Make sure the converter supports the option card to be installed.

Contact Magnetek for assistance.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

oFb01

Option Card Fault at Option

Port CN5-B

Option not properly connected.

Cause Possible Solution

The option card connection to port CN5-B is faulty.

Turn off the power and reconnect the option card.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-15

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

oFb02

Option Card Fault at Option

Port CN5-B

Same type of option card is currently connected.

Cause

An option card of the same type is already installed in option port CN5-A.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name

Possible Solution

Only one of each option card type can only be installed simultaneously. Make sure only one type of option card is connected.

Details

oFb03 to oFb11

Option card error occurred at

Option Port CN5-B oFb12 to oFb17

Option card error occurred at

Option Port CN5-B

There is a fault in the option card.

Cause

Option card or hardware is damaged.

Possible Solution

Cycle power to the converter.

If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

oFC00

Option Card Connection

Error at Option Port CN5-C

Option compatibility error

Cause Possible Solution

The option card installed into port CN5-C is incompatible with the converter.

Confirm that the converter supports the option card to be installed.

Contact Magnetek for assistance.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

oFC01

Option Card Fault at Option

Port CN5-C

Option not properly connected.

Cause Possible Solution

The option card connection to port CN5-C is faulty.

Digital Operator

Fault Name

Display

oFC02

Turn the power off and reconnect the option card.

Details

Option Card Fault at Option

Port CN5-C

Same type of option card is currently connected.

Cause

An option card of the same type is already installed in option port CN5-A or CN5-B.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name

Possible Solution

Only one of each option card type can only be installed simultaneously. Make sure only one type of option card is connected.

Details

oFC03 to oFC11

Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-C

There is a fault in the option card.

oFC12 to oFC17

Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-C

Cause Possible Solution

Option card or hardware is damaged.

Cycle power to the converter.

If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire converter. Contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative for instructions on replacing the control board.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-16

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name

oFC50 to oFC55

Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-C

Option card is damaged.

Details

Cause

Option card or hardware is damaged.

Digital Operator

Display

Surrounding temperature is too high.

Load is too heavy.

oH

Cause

Internal cooling fan is stopped.

Fault Name

Heatsink Overheat

Possible Solution

Refer to the option manual for details.

Details

The heatsink temperature exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02. The default value for L8-02 is determined by o2-04 (drive model selection).

Possible Solution

Check the temperature surrounding the converter. Verify temperature is within converter specifications.

Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.

Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.

Remove anything near the converter that might be producing excessive heat.

Measure the output current.

Decrease the load.

Replace the cooling fan.

After replacing the cooling fan, set parameter o4-03 to 0 to reset the cooling fan maintenance.

Digital Operator

Display

Load is too heavy.

oH1

Internal cooling fan is stopped.

Fault Name

Overheat 1 (Heatsink

Overheat)

Surrounding temperature is too high.

Details

The heatsink temperature exceeded the converter overheat level.

Overheat level is determined by o2-04 (drive model selection).

Check the temperature surrounding the converter.

Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.

Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.

Remove anything near the converter that might be producing excessive heat.

Measure the output current.

Decrease the load.

Replace the cooling fan.

After replacing the cooling fan, set parameter o4-03 to 0 to reset the cooling fan maintenance.

Digital Operator

Display

oL2

Fault Name Details

Converter Overload The thermal sensor of the converter triggered overload protection.

Cause

Load is too heavy.

Converter capacity is too small.

The converter does not operate.

Possible Solution

Reduce the load.

Replace the converter with a larger model.

Start converter operation first, and then start converter operation.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

oPr

External Digital Operator

Connection Fault

The external operator has been disconnected from the converter.

NOTE:

An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true:

Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected

(o2-06 = 1).

The Run command is assigned to the operator (b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected).

Cause Possible Solution

External operator is not properly connected to the converter.

Check the connection between the operator and the converter.

Replace the cable if damaged.

Turn off the input power and disconnect the operator.

Reconnect the operator and reapply converter input power.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-17

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

ov

Cause

The regenerative load is too large.

Input power voltage is too high.

Overvoltage

Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.

For 230 V class models: approximately 410 V

For 460 V class models: approximately 820 V

Possible Solution

Reduce the regenerative load.

• Check the voltage.

• Lower input power voltage within the limits listed in the specifications.

Converter fails to operate properly due to noise interference.

Review the list of possible solutions provided for controlling noise.

Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring.

The wiring of the power supply voltage detection circuits

(r1/ 11, 1/ 21, t1/ 31) and the wiring of the

Correct the wiring.

main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) is not correct.

Digital Operator

Fault Name Details

Display

PF2 Input Power Supply Fault

Abnormal oscillation in the main circuit DC bus continued. (Applies when L8-65 is set to 1 or 2.)

Cause Possible Solution

The fluctuation in the voltage of the input power supply is too large.

A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.

The capacity of the power supply is too small.

Investigate and correct the cause and then reset the fault.

Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 5-31.

The wiring is too long.

The phase imbalance is too large.

Digital Operator

Fault Name Details

Display

PF3 Input Phase Loss Detection

The voltage balance in the three-phase power supply has broken down. (Detected when L8-69 = 1.)

Cause Possible Solution

The fluctuation in the voltage of the input power supply is too large.

A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.

The capacity of the power supply is too small.

The wiring is too long.

Investigate and correct the cause and then reset the fault.

Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 5-31.

The phase imbalance is too large.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

SC

Input Short-circuit/Main

Transistor Failure

Short circuit or ground fault is detected.

IGBT fault.

Cause

IGBT short circuit detection circuit fault.

Possible Solution

• Check the wiring to the drive.

• Turn the power supply off and then on again to check operation.

If the problem continues, contact your Magnetek representative or the

Magnetek service department.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

SrC Phase Order Fault

The phase order detection direction for the input power supply changed after the power supply was turned on.

Cause Possible Solution

The power supply phase order changed during operation.

A momentary power loss occurred.

An input power supply wiring terminal is loose.

Investigate and correct the cause and then reset the fault.

Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 5-31.

The fluctuation in the voltage of the input power supply is too large.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-18

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

Uv1 Main Circuit Undervoltage

Cause

A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.

An input power supply wiring terminal is loose.

Fluctuation occurred in the power supply voltage.

A power loss occurred.

The main circuit capacitor circuit in the converter has deteriorated.

The operation of the relay or contactor in the inrush current protection circuit in the converter failed.

A fault occurred in the power supply device.

A fault occurred in the power supply.

A fault occurred in power supply voltage detection.

The following condition occurred in the converter when a Run

Command was not being input.

The main circuit DC voltage became equal to or lower than the set value of L2-05 (Undervoltage Detection Level).

230 V Class: Approx. 190 V

460 V Class: Approx. 380 V

Possible Solution

Check the wiring of the main circuit power supply for broken wires and wiring mistakes.

• Correct the wiring.

Check the terminals for looseness.

• Tighten the terminals to the tightening torque that is given in this manual. (See page 3-14.)

Check the voltage.

• Correct the voltage so that it is within the range given in the power supply specifications of the converter.

• If there is no problem with the main circuit power supply, check the magnetic contactor in the main circuit for faults.

Improve the power supply.

Check the maintenance period for the capacitor in U4-05 (Capacitor

Maintenance).

• If the value of U4-05 has exceeded 90%, replace the board or the converter. For information on board replacement, consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Cycle the power supply and see if the fault occurs again.

• If the fault occurs repeatedly, replace the board or the converter. For information on board replacement, consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Check the maintenance period for the inrush prevention relay in U4-

06 (Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance).

• If the value of U4-06 has exceeded 90%, replace the board or the converter. For information on board replacement, consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Check the wiring.

• Correct the wiring.

A fault occurred in the power supply.

Check the wiring.

• Correct the wiring.

Digital Operator

Display

Uv2

Fault Name

Control Power Supply

Voltage Fault

Cause

Details

Voltage is too low for the control converter input power.

Internal circuitry is damaged.

Possible Solution

Cycle power to the converter. Check if the fault reoccurs.

If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire converter. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

Uv3

Undervoltage 3 (Soft-Charge

Bypass Circuit Fault)

The soft-charge bypass circuit failed.

Cause Possible Solution

The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass circuit is damaged.

Cycle power to the converter and see if the fault reoccurs.

If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire converter. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative.

Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the softcharge bypass.

Replace either the control board or the entire converter if

U4-06 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-19

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

Uv4

Gate Drive Board

Undervoltage

Voltage drop in the gate drive board circuit.

Cause

Not enough power is being supplied to the gate drive board.

Possible Solution

Cycle power to the converter and see if the fault reoccurs.

Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 5-31 for details.

If the problem continues, replace either the gate drive board or the entire converter. For instructions on replacing the gate drive board, contact Magnetek or a Magnetek representative.

Digital Operator

Display

Fault Name Details

vrE Resonance Detection

A filter resonance fault was detected or there is a harmonic component on the power supply side.

Cause Possible Solution

The power supply was turned off during operation.

There is noise on the power supply line.

Stop the operation of the converter and turn off the power supply.

Investigate the source of the noise and implement countermeasures.

A phase was lost for an input terminal during operation.

Check the wiring of the power supply system and remove the cause of the phase loss.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

<2> Detected in model 41040-D+.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-20

Alarm Detection

Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Alarms are converter protection functions that do not necessarily cause the converter to stop. After removing the cause of an alarm, the converter will return to the same status is was before the alarm occurred.

When an alarm has been triggered, the ALM light on the digital operator display blinks and the alarm code display flashes. If a multi-function output is set for an alarm (H2-xx = 10), that output terminal will be triggered.

NOTE: If a multi-function output is set to close when an alarm occurs (H2-xx = 10), it will also close when maintenance periods are reached, triggering alarms LT-1 through LT-4

(triggered only if H2-xx = 2F).

Table 5-7: Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

AEr

Communication Option

Station Number

Setting Error (CC-Link,

CANopen,

MECHATROLINK-II)

Option card node address is outside of the acceptable setting range.

Cause

Station number is set outside the possible setting range.

Possible Solutions

Set the station number of the option card correctly.

Digital Operator

Display

Aov

Cause

Minor Fault

Name

Power Supply

Overvoltage

The input power supply voltage is too high.

YES

Details

The input power supply voltage became equal to or higher than the

Input Power Supply Overvoltage Detection Level (L8-36).

230 V Class: Approx. 277 VAC

460 V Class: Approx. 554 VAC

Possible Solutions

Reduce the voltage to within the range in the power supply specifications.

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

YES

Digital Operator

Display

AUv

Cause

The power supply voltage is low.

A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.

Voltage detection failed.

Digital Operator

Display

bb

Minor Fault

Name

Power Supply

Undervoltage

Minor Fault

Name

Baseblock

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

The input power supply voltage became equal to or lower than the

Input Power Supply Undervoltage Detection Level.

230 V Class: Approx. 150 VAC

460 V Class: Approx. 300 VAC

YES

Possible Solutions

Increase the power supply voltage.

Check the input power supply for phase loss or an imbalance in the interphase voltages. Investigate and correct the cause and then reset the fault.

Correctly wire

r1/ 11, 1/ 21, and t1/ 31.

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

Converter output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal.

N.A.

Cause Possible Solutions

External baseblock signal was entered via one of the multi-function input terminals (S1 to S8).

Check external sequence and baseblock signal input timing.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-21

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

bUS

Option Card

Communication Error

The connection was lost after initial communication was established.

Assign a Run command frequency reference to the option card.

YES

Cause

Connection is broken or master controller stopped communicating.

Option card is damaged.

The option card is not properly connected to the converter.

A data error occurred due to noise.

Possible Solutions

Check for faulty wiring.

Correct the wiring.

Check for disconnected cables and short circuits. Repair as needed.

If there are no problems with the wiring and the fault continues to occur, replace the option card.

• The connector pins on the option card are not properly lined up with the connector pins on the converter.

• Reinstall the option card.

Check options available to minimize the effects of noise.

Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines and ground wiring.

Try to reduce noise on the controller side.

Use surge absorbers on magnetic contactors or other equipment causing the disturbance.

Use recommended cables or some other type of shielded line. Ground the shield to the controller side or on the input power side.

Separate the wiring for communication devices from the converter input power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the converter input power.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

CALL

Serial Communication

Transmission Error

Communication has not yet been established.

YES

Cause Possible Solutions

Communications wiring is faulty, there is a short circuit, or something is not connected properly.

Check for wiring errors.

Correct the wiring.

Check for disconnected cables and short circuits. Repair as needed.

Programming error on the master side.

Check communications at start-up and correct programming errors.

• Perform a self-diagnostics check.

Communications circuitry is damaged.

• If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire converter. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact

Magnetek.

Termination resistor setting is incorrect.

Install a termination resistor at both ends of a communication line. Set the internal termination resistor switch correctly on slave converters. Place DIP switch S2 to the ON position.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-22

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

CE

MEMOBUS/Modbus

Communication Error

Control data was not received correctly for two seconds.

Cause

A data error occurred due to noise.

Communication protocol is incompatible.

The CE detection time (H5-09) is set shorter than the time required for a communication cycle to take place.

Incompatible PLC software settings or there is a hardware problem.

Communications cable is disconnected or damaged.

YES

Possible Solutions

Check options available to minimize the effects of noise.

Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines, and ground wiring.

Reduce noise on the controller side.

Use surge absorbers for the magnetic contactors or other components that may be causing the disturbance.

Use only recommended shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the converter input power side.

Separate all wiring for communication devices from converter input power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the converter input power supply.

Check the H5 parameter settings and the protocol setting in the controller.

Ensure settings are compatible.

Check the PLC.

Change the software settings in the PLC.

Set a longer CE detection time using parameter H5-09.

Check the PLC.

Remove the cause of the error on the controller side.

Check the connector to make sure the cable has a signal.

Replace the communications cable.

Digital Operator

Display

CoF

Cause

Current Offset Fault

A fault occurred in the current detection circuit.

Digital Operator

Display

CrST

Minor Fault

Name

Minor Fault

Name

Cannot Reset

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

A fault occurred in adjustment of the automatic current offset when the power supply was turned on.

YES

Possible Solutions

Cycle the power supply and check operation.

*If the fault occurs again, replace the board or converter. For information on board replacement, consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

A fault reset command was entered while the Run command was still present.

YES

Cause

Fault reset was being executed when a Run command was entered.

Possible Solutions

Ensure that a Run command cannot be entered from the external terminals or option during fault reset.

Turn off the Run command.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

EF0

Option Card External

Fault

An external fault condition is present.

YES

Cause Possible Solutions

An external fault was received from the PLC with

F6-03 set to 3, which allows the converter to continue running after an external fault occurs.

Remove the cause of the external fault.

Remove the external fault input from the PLC.

There is a problem with the PLC program.

Check the PLC program and correct problems.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-23

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

EF1

EF2

EF3

EF4

EF5

EF6

EF7

External Fault (Input

Terminal S1)

External fault at multi-function input terminal S1.

External Fault (Input

Terminal S2)

External fault at multi-function input terminal S2.

External Fault (Input

Terminal S3)

External fault at multi-function input terminal S3.

External Fault (Input

Terminal S4)

External fault at multi-function input terminal S4.

External Fault (Input

Terminal S5)

External fault at multi-function input terminal S5.

External Fault (Input

Terminal S6)

External fault at multi-function input terminal S6.

External Fault (Input

Terminal S7)

External fault at multi-function input terminal S7.

YES

An external device has tripped an alarm function.

Wiring is incorrect.

EF8

Cause

External Fault (Input

Terminal S8)

External fault at multi-function input terminal S8.

Multi-function contact inputs are set incorrectly.

Possible Solutions

Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the multi-function input value. Refer to

Stopping the Converter for Faults in Peripheral Devices on page 4-15 for details.

Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for external fault detection (H1-xx=24 to 27, 2C to 2F).

Reconnect the signal line. Refer to Stopping the Converter for Faults in

Peripheral Devices on page 4-15 for details.

Check if the unused terminals have been set for H1-xx = 24 to 27, 2C to 2F

(External Fault).

Change the terminal settings. Refer to Stopping the Converter for Faults in

Peripheral Devices on page 4-15 for details.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

FAn

Cause

Converter Internal

Circulation Fan Fault

The internal circulation fan in the converter is faulty.

An internal circulation fan is faulty (2400-D+ or

4210-D+ to 4560-D+).

An internal circulation fan or MC power supply is faulty (2400-D+ or 4210-D+ to 4560-D+).

Digital Operator

Display

Fdv

Minor Fault

Name

Power Supply

Frequency Fault

YES

Possible Solutions

Cycle the power supply and see if the fault occurs again.

Check the operation of the internal circulation fans.

Check U4-03 (Cooling Fan Operation Time) and U4-04 (Cooling Fan Maintenance

Display).

• If the life of the internal circulation fans has expired or if a fan is faulty, perform fan replacement according to instructions in this manual.

Cycle the power supply and see if the fault occurs again.

• If the fault occurs repeatedly, replace the board or the converter. For information on board replacement, consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

The input power supply frequency exceeded the allowable frequency fluctuation.

YES

Cause

A momentary power loss occurred.

An input power supply wiring terminal is loose.

The fluctuation in the voltage of the input power supply is too large.

Possible Solutions

Investigate and correct the cause and then reset the fault. Refer to Diagnosing and

Resetting Faults on page 5-31.

The AC power supply fuse burned out.

A transistor inside the converter was destroyed.

The input wiring or drive output has ground faulted or short circuited.

→ Contact your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

The phase rotation direction has changed in the input power supply.

The detected power supply frequency exceeded the allowable value.

Correct the wiring.

Improve the power supply.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-24

Digital Operator

Display

Load is too heavy.

HCA

Cause

Minor Fault

Name

Current Alarm

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

Converter current exceeded overcurrent warning level (150% of the rated current).

YES

Possible Solutions

Reduce the load for applications with repetitive operations (i.e., stops and starts), or replace the converter.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

LT-1

Cooling Fan

Maintenance Time

The cooling fan has reached its expected maintenance period and may need to be replaced.

NOTE: An alarm output (H2-xx = 10) will only be triggered if both (H2-xx = 2F and H2-xx = 10) are set.

Possible Solutions

YES

Cause

The cooling fan has reached 90% of its expected performance life.

Replace the cooling fan and set o4-03 to 0 to reset the Maintenance Monitor.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

LT-2

Digital Operator

Display

Capacitor

Maintenance Time

Minor Fault

Name

The main circuit and control circuit capacitors are nearing the end of their expected performance life.

NOTE: Note: An alarm output (H2-XX = 10) will only be triggered if H2-XX = 2F.

Details

YES

Cause Possible Solutions

The main circuit and control circuit capacitors have reached 90% of their expected performance lives.

Replace either the control board or the entire converter. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Magnetek.

Alarm

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details Output

(H2-xx=10)

LT-3

Soft Charge Bypass

Relay Maintenance

Time

The DC bus soft charge relay is nearing the end of its expected performance life.

NOTE: An alarm output (H2-XX = 10) will only be triggered if

H2-XX = 2F.

YES

Cause Possible Solutions

The main circuit and control circuit capacitors have reached 90% of their expected performance lives.

Replace either the control board or the entire converter. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Magnetek.

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

oH Heatsink Overheat

Details

The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02 (90-100 °C). Default value for L8-02 is determined by o2-04 (drive model selection).

YES

Cause

Surrounding temperature is too high.

Airflow around the converter is restricted.

Possible Solutions

Check the surrounding temperature.

Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.

Install a fan or air conditioner to cool surrounding area.

Remove anything near converter that may cause extra heat.

Provide proper installation space around the converter as indicated in the manual. Refer to Installation Orientation and Spacing on page 2-13 for details.

Allow for the proper space and ensure that there is sufficient circulation around the control panel.

The ambient temperature is too high.

The load is too large.

Internal cooling fan has stopped.

Check for dust or other foreign materials clogging the cooling fan.

Clear debris caught in the fan that restricts air circulation.

Check the ambient temperature.

• Improve ventilation in the control panel.

Install a cooling device (e.g., a cooling fan or air conditioner) and lower the ambient temperature.

If there are heat-generating objects nearby, remove them.

Measure the output current.

• Lower the load.

Replace the cooling fan.

After replacing the converter, set parameter o4-03 to 0 to reset the cooling fan operation time.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-25

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

YES oL2 Converter Overload The thermal sensor of the converter triggered overload protection.

Cause

Load is too heavy.

The converter does not operate.

Possible Solutions

Reduce the load.

Start converter operation first, and then start converter operation.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

ov DC Bus Overvoltage

A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.

The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point.

For 230 V class models: approximately 410 V

For 460 V class models: approximately 820 V

YES

Cause

Electrical noise interference causes the converter to operate incorrectly.

Possible Solutions

Review possible solutions for handling noise interference.

Review section on handling noise interference and check control circuit lines, main circuit lines and ground wiring.

If the magnetic contactor is identified as a source of noise, install a surge protector to the MC coil.

Set number of fault restarts (L5-01) to a value other than 0.

There was a regenerative load while the converter is stopped.

Operate the converter.

The power supply voltage is too high.

Lower the voltage so that it is within the power supply specifications of the converter.

There is a regenerative load while the converter is stopped.

Operate the converter.

The wiring of the power supply voltage detection circuits (r1/ 11, 1/ 21, 31) and the wiring of the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and

T/L3) is not correct.

Check the wiring.

• Correct the wiring.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

PAUv

Power Supply

Undervoltage Pre-

Alarm

The input power supply voltage became equal to or lower than the

Input Power Supply Undervoltage Detection Level.

230 V Class: Approx. 150 VAC

460 V Class: Approx. 300 VAC

The converter enters the baseblock state during pre-alarm. When the input supply voltage is restored during the pre-alarm, the converter will release the base block and continue to operate.

YES

Cause

The power supply voltage is low.

Possible Solutions

Increase the power supply voltage.

Check the input power supply for phase loss or an imbalance in the interphase voltages. Investigate and correct the cause and then reset the fault.

Voltage detection failed.

Check r1/ 11, 1/ 21, t1/ 31 to see if they are wired correctly.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

PF3

Input Phase Loss

Detection

Cause

The fluctuation in the voltage of the input power supply is too large.

A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.

The interphase voltage balance is bad.

Abnormal oscillation continued in the input power supply voltage.

(Detected when L8-69 = 1.)

Possible Solutions

YES

Investigate the cause and implement countermeasures. Refer to Diagnosing and

Resetting Faults on page 5-31 for details.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

SE

MEMOBUS/Modbus

Test Mode Fault

A MEMOBUS/Modbus communications test was performed during operation.

YES

Cause Possible Solutions

A fault occurred during MEMOBUS/Modbus

Communications Test Mode.

Always stop the operation of the converter before you perform MEMOBUS/Modbus communications tests.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-26

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

SrC Phase Order Fault

The phase order detection direction for the input power supply changed after the power supply was turned on.

YES

Cause

A momentary power loss occurred.

An input power supply wiring terminal is loose.

The fluctuation in the voltage of the input power supply is too large.

Possible Solutions

Investigate and correct the cause and then reset the fault. Refer to Diagnosing and

Resetting Faults on page 5-31 for details.

Digital Operator

Display

Minor Fault

Name

Details

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

Uv

Digital Operator

Display

Undervoltage

Minor Fault

Name

One of the following conditions was true when the converter was stopped and a Run command was entered:

• DC bus voltage dropped below the level specified in L2-

05.

Contactor to suppress inrush current in the converter was opened.

Low voltage in the control converter input power. This alarm outputs only if

L2-01 is not 0 and DC bus voltage is under L2-05.

Details

YES

Cause

Phase loss in the converter input power.

Loose wiring in the converter input power terminals.

Possible Solutions

Check for wiring errors in the main circuit input power. Correct the wiring.

Ensure the terminals have been properly tightened.

Apply the tightening torque to the terminals as specified. Refer to Wire

Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 3-14.

There is a problem with the converter input power voltage.

A power loss occurred.

Internal circuitry is worn.

Check the voltage.

Lower the voltage of the converter input power so that it is within the limits listed in the specifications.

Improve the power supply.

• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).

• Replace either the control board or the entire converter if U4-05 exceeds

90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Magnetek.

The converter input power transformer is too small and voltage drops when the power is switched on.

Air inside the converter is too hot.

Check for an alarm when the magnetic contactor, line breaker, and leakage breaker are closed.

Check the capacity of the converter input power transformer.

Check the temperature inside the converter.

The CHARGE light is broken or disconnected.

Replace either the control board or the entire converter. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Magnetek.

Alarm

Output

(H2-xx=10)

vrE Resonance Detection

A filter resonance fault was detected or there is a harmonic component on the power supply side.

YES

Cause Possible Solutions

There is noise on the power supply line.

Investigate the source of the noise and implement countermeasures.

<1> If the fault occurs when starting the converter, CPF00 or CPF20 is displayed. If it occurs during operation, CPF01 or CPF21 is displayed.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-27

Operator Programming Errors

Operator Programming Error Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when a contradictory parameter is set or an individual parameter is set to an inappropriate value.

The converter will not operate until the parameter or parameters causing the problem are set correctly. An oPE, however, does not trigger an alarm or fault output. If an oPE occurs, investigate the cause and refer to Table 5-8 for the appropriate action. When an oPE appears on the operator display, press the ENTER button to view U1-18 and see which parameter is causing the oPE.

Table 5-8: oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions

Digital Operator

Display

Err

Error Name

EEPROM Write Error

Details

A verification mismatch occurred when writing data to the EEPROM.

Cause Possible Solution

The data was corrupted by noise when writing data to the

EEPROM.

EEPROM Hardware Failure

Press .

Set the parameters again.

Cycle the power supply. Refer to Diagnosing and

Resetting Faults on page 5-31 for details.

Replace the board or converter. For information on board replacement, consult with your Magnetek representative or the

Magnetek service department.

Digital Operator

Display

Error Name Details

oPE01

Converter Capacity Setting

Fault

Converter capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match.

Cause

The drive model selection (o2-04) and the actual capacity of the converter are not the same.

Digital Operator

Display

Error Name

oPE02

Possible Solution

Correct the value set to o2-04.

Details

Parameter Range Setting

Error

Set parameters to the proper values.

Cause Possible Solution

Parameters were set outside the possible setting range. Correct the value set to o2-04.

NOTE: When multiple errors occur simultaneously, other errors are given precedence over oPE02.

Digital Operator

Display

Error Name Details

oPE03

Multi-Function Input

Selection Error

A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function contact inputs H1-

01 to H1-08.

Cause

The same function is assigned to two multi-function inputs. Excludes “Not used” and “External Fault.”

Possible Solution

Ensure all multi-function inputs are assigned to different functions.

Re-enter the multi-function settings to ensure this does not occur.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-28

Digital Operator

Display

Error Name Details

oPE04

Terminal Board Mismatch

Error

The converter or the removable terminal block with parameter backup was replaced.

Cause Possible Solution

The converter was replaced (but the removable terminal block with parameter backup was not replaced).

The removable terminal block with parameter backup was replaced.

Set A1-03 to 5550 to load the parameter settings stored in the terminal board to the converter. Initialize parameters after converter replacement by setting A1-03 to 2220.

Digital Operator

Display

Error Name Details

oPE05

Run Command Selection

Error

The settings for the Run Command or Bus Voltage Command are not correct.

Cause Possible Solution

The Run command is assigned to an option card (b1-18

= 3) and an input option card is not connected to the converter.

Reconnect the input option card to the converter.

The Run command is assigned to an option card (b1-02

= 3) and an input option card is not connected to the converter.

Digital Operator

Display

Error Name Details

oPE07

Multi-Function Analog Input

Selection Error

A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function analog inputs H3-

02, H3-10, or H3-06.

Cause Possible Solution

At least two of these parameters have the same setting:

H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06.

Change the settings to H3-02, H3-10, and H3-06 so that functions no longer conflict.

NOTE: Both 1F (Through mode) and F (Through mode) can be set to H3-02, H3-10, or H3-06 simultaneously.

Digital Operator

Display

Error Name Details

oPE30

Incorrect Input Voltage

Adjustment

The input voltage offset adjustment has not been performed.

Cause Possible Solution

The setting of o2-04 (Drive Model Selection) changed.

ERPROM failed for the input voltage offset.

For information on clearing the fault, consult with your Magnetek representative or the Magnetek service department.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-29

Copy Function Related Displays

Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting

The table below lists the messages and errors that may appear when using the Copy function. When executing the tasks offered by the Copy function, the operator will indicate the task being performed.

When an error occurs, a code appears on the operator to indicate the error. Note that errors related to the Copy function do not trigger a multifunction output terminal that has been set up to close when a fault or alarm occurs. To clear an error, simply press any key on the operator and the error display will disappear.

Table 5-9 lists the corrective action that can be taken when an error occurs.

NOTE: 1. Whenever using the copy function, the converter should be fully stopped.

2. The converter will not accept a Run command while the Copy function is being executed.

3. Parameters can only be saved to a converter when the voltage class, capacity, control mode, and software version match.

Table 5-9: Copy Function Task and Error Displays

Digital Operator Display

LED LCD

CoPy

CPyE

CSEr dFPS

End iFEr ndAT rdEr rEAd vAEr vFyE vrFy

Error Name

Writing Parameter Settings (flashing)

Error Writing Data

Copy Unit Error

Converter Model Mismatch

Task Complete

Communication Error

Model, Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch

Error Reading Data

Reading Parameter Settings (flashing)

Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch

Parameter settings in the converter and those saved to the copy function are not the same

Comparing parameter settings (flashing)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-30

Diagnosing and Resetting Faults

When a fault occurs and the converter stops, follow the instructions below to remove whatever conditions triggered the fault, then restart the converter.

Fault Reset Methods

When a fault occurs, the cause of the fault must be removed and the converter must be restarted.

The table below lists the different ways to restart the converter.

After the Fault Occurs Procedure

Fix the cause of the fault, restart the converter, and reset the fault

Press on the digital operator when the error code is displayed.

Resetting via Fault Reset Digital

Input S4

Close then open the fault signal digital input via terminal S4. S4 is set for “Fault Reset” as default (H1-

04 = 14).

Turn off the main power supply if the above methods do not reset the fault. Reapply power after the digital operator display has turned off.

NOTE: If the Run command is present, the converter will disregard any attempts to reset the fault.

Remove the Run command before attempting to clear a fault situation.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-31

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

5-32

This page intentionally left blank.

C h a p t e r

6

Standard Configuration

Devices, Peripheral Devices, and Options

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

6-2

This page intentionally left blank.

Converter Options and Peripheral Devices

Table 6-1 lists the names of the various peripheral devices, accessories, and options available for

Magnetek converters. Contact Magnetek or your Magnetek sales representative to order these peripheral devices.

• Peripheral Device Selection: Contact Magnetek for selection and part numbers.

• Peripheral Device Installation: Refer to the corresponding option manual for installation instructions.

Table 6-1: Available Peripheral Devices

Option

24 V Power Supply

USB Copy Unit (RJ-

45/USB compatible plug)

Analog Monitor

Digital Output

Model Number Description

PS-A10L (230 V class)

PS-A10H (460 V class)

Power Options

Provides power supply for the control circuit and option boards.

NOTE: Parameter settings cannot be changed when the drive is operating solely from this power supply.

COPY-STICK

AO-A3

DO-A3

Interface Options

• Can copy parameter settings easily and quickly to be later transferred to another converter.

• Adapter for connecting converter to the USB port of a PC.

Monitor Option Cards

Outputs analog signal for monitoring the output state (input frequency, output voltage etc.) of the converter.

Output resolution: 11 bit signed (1/2048)

Output voltage: 0 to 10 VDC (non-isolated)

Terminals: 2 analog outputs

Outputs isolated type digital signal for monitoring the run state of the converter (alarm signal, during run, etc.)

Terminals: 6 photocoupler outputs (48 V, 50 mA or less)

2 relay contact outputs (250 VAC, 1 A or less 30 VDC, 1 A or less)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

6-3

Standard Configuration Devices Wiring

Voltage Class

Model

Harmonic Filter

Module

Input-side AC

Reactor 1

Input-side AC

Reactor 2

Reactor for

Harmonic Filter

Capacitor for

Harmonic Filter

Install the standard configuration devices according to Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 when installing the converter.

For more information, refer to Standard Connection Diagram on page 3-3. Refer to the product catalog for selection of standard configuration devices.

Table 6-2: Standard Configuration Devices (230 V Class)

230 V Class

2015-D+ 2030-D+ 2057-D+ 2083-D+ 2140-D+ 2200-D+ 2270-D+ 2400-D+

       

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

Table 6-3: Standard Configuration Devices (460 V Class)

Voltage Class

Model

Harmonic Filter

Module

Input-side AC

Reactor 1

Input-side AC

Reactor 2

Reactor for

Harmonic Filter

Capacitor for

Harmonic Filter

460 V Class

4008-D+ 4016-D+ 4030-D+ 4043-D+ 4058-D+ 4086-D+ 4145-D+ 4210-D+ 4300-D+ 4410-D+ 4560-D+ 41040-D+

         ----

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque

Use the tables in this section to select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals.

NOTE: 1. Wire gauge recommendations based on continuous current ratings using 75°C 600

VAC vinyl-sheathed wire assuming ambient temperature within 40°C.

2. Wire gauge recommendations for models 4410-D+ to 41040-D+ based on continuous current ratings using 105°C 600 VAC vinyl sheathed wire assuming ambient temperature within 40°C.

Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:

Line drop voltage (V) = √ 3 × wire resistance ( Ω /km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-

3

Harmonic Filter Module

Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 3-14 when wiring of the harmonic filter module.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

6-4

Input-side AC Reactor 1

Table 6-4: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications

Model Terminal

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

230 V Class

Screw Size

12 12 to 10 M4

Tightening Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, X

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

4008-D+

4016-D+

4030-D+

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

8

4

2

3

3/0 x 2P

3/0 x 2P

12

8

6

4

2

3 x 2P

3/0 x 2P

3/0 x 2P

300 x 2P

4/0 x 4P

4/0 x 8P

8 to 6

4

2 to 1

3 to 2/0

3/0

3/0 to 4/0

300 x 2P 300 to 400

12

460 V Class

12 to 10

12 to 10

8

6

4

2 to 1

3 to 2/0

3/0

3/0 to 4/0

300

4/0 to 300

4/0 to 300

M5

M6

M8

M8

M12

M12

M12

M4

M4

M6

M8

M8

M8

M8

M12

M12

M12

M12

M12

1.0 to 1.3

(8.9 to 11.5)

1.0 to 1.3

(8.9 to 11.5)

4.0 to 4.9

(35.4 to 43.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.0 to 1.3

(8.9 to 11.5)

2.0 to 2.5

(17.7 to 22.1)

4.0 to 4.9

(35.4 to 43.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

31.4 to 39.2

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

6-5

Input-side AC Reactor 2

Table 6-5: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications

Model Terminal

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

U, V, W

X, Y, Z

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

Screw Size

300 x 2P 300 M12

4/0 x 4P

4/0 x 8P

4/0 to 300

4/0 to 300

M12

M12

Tightening Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

Reactor for Harmonic Filter

Table 6-6: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications

Model Terminal

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

X, Y, Z

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

X, Y, Z

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

X, Y, Z

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

Screw Size

4 4 M8

1

1 x 2P

1

1 to 2/0

M8

M10

Tightening Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

8.9 to 10.7

(79.7 to 97.4)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

Capacitor for Harmonic Filter

Table 6-7: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications

Model Terminal

4410-D+ U, V, W

4560-D+ U, V, W

41040-D+ U, V, W

Recomm.

Gauge

AWG

Applicable

Gauge

AWG

Screw Size

4 4 M12

1

1 x 2P

1

1 to 2/0

M12

M12

Tightening Torque

N-m

(lb-in)

18.0 to 22.0

(159.3 to 194.7)

18.0 to 22.0

(159.3 to 194.7)

18.0 to 22.0

(159.3 to 194.7)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

6-6

Installing Peripheral Devices

This section describes the proper steps and precautions to take when installing or connecting various peripheral devices to the converter.

N O T I C E

Use a class 2 power supply when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral devices could result in converter performance degradation due to improper power supply. Refer to NEC Article 725 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote-Control,

Signaling, and Power Limited Circuits for requirements concerning class 2 power supplies.

Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Ground Fault

Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)

Install an MCCB or GFCI for line protection between the power supply and the main circuit power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. This protects the main circuit and devices wired to the main circuit while also providing overload protection.

N O T I C E

Prevent Equipment Damage. Install a fuse and a GFCI to model 41040-D+. Failure to comply may result in damage to the power supply in the event of a short circuit.

Consider the following when selecting and installing an MCCB or a GFCI:

• The capacity of the MCCB or GFCI should be 1.5 to 2 times the rated output current of the converter. Use an MCCB or GFCI to keep the converter from faulting out instead of using overheat protection (150% for one minute at the rated output current).

• If several converters are connected to one MCCB or GFCI that is shared with other equipment, use a sequence that shuts the power OFF when errors are output by using magnetic contactor

(MC) as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1: Power Supply Interrupt Wiring (Example)

WA R N I N G

Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect the MCCB (or GFCI) and MC before wiring terminals. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

6-7

Application Precautions when Installing a GFCI

Converter outputs generate high-frequency leakage current as a result of high-speed switching.

Install a GFCI on the input side of the converter to switch off potentially harmful leakage current.

Use a GFCI with harmonic countermeasures and with a rated operating current of 30 mA minimum for each connected converter at the power supply side to eliminate harmonic leakage current and suppress any potentially harmful frequencies.

Leakage current can cause unprotected components to operate incorrectly. If this is a problem, lower the carrier frequency, replace the components in question with parts protected against harmonic current, or increase the sensitivity amperage of the circuit interrupter to at least 200 mA per converter.

Factors in determining leakage current:

• Size of the converter

• EMI/RFI filter

• Carrier frequency

• Motor cable type and length

Select an interrupter that senses all types of current (AC and DC) and high frequency currents to safely protect the system.

Installing a Magnetic Contactor at the Power Supply Side

Disconnecting the Power Supply

Instead of an MCCB, you can also use an MC in the sequence to turn off the power supply for the main circuits when protection functions in the converter are activated or for emergency stop operations. However, if an MC at the input (primary side) to the converter is used to force the converter to stop, it will stop without performing regenerative operation. Create the sequence carefully.

N O T I C E

Do not connect electromagnetic switches or MCs to the output motor circuits without proper sequencing. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits could result in damage to the converter.

N O T I C E

Install an MC on the input side of the drive when the converter should not automatically restart after power loss. To get the full performance life out of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays, refrain from switching the converter power supply off and on more than once every 30 minutes. Frequent use can damage the converter. Use the converter to stop and start the motor.

N O T I C E

Use a magnetic contactor (MC) to ensure that power to the converter can be completely shut off when necessary. The MC should be wired so that it opens when a fault output terminal is triggered.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

6-8

NOTE: Set up a delay that prevents the MC from opening prematurely to continue operating the converter through a momentary power loss.

Connecting a Surge Absorber

A surge absorber suppresses surge voltage generated from switching an inductive load near the converter. Inductive loads include magnetic contactors, relays, valves, solenoids, and brakes.

Always use a surge absorber or diode when operating with an inductive load.

WA R N I N G

Fire Hazard. Do not connect surge absorbers to the converter output power terminals.

Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death by fire or flying debris.

Attachment for External Heatsink Mounting

An external attachment can be used to project the heatsink outside of an enclosure to ensure that there is sufficient air circulation around the heatsink.

Contact a Magnetek sales representative or Magnetek directly for more information on this attachment.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

6-9

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

6-10

This page intentionally left blank.

A p p e n d i x

A

Specifications

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

A-2

This page intentionally left blank.

Power Ratings

Table A-1: Power Ratings (Three-Phase 230 V Class)

Item

Model

Maximum Applicable

Motor Capacity [HP]

Rating

Rating

Rated Output

Capacity [HP]

<1>

Rated Output

Capacity [kW]

<2>

Rating

Rated Output

Current (DC) [A]

Rated Input

Current (AC) [A]

Rated Output

Voltage [V]

2015-D+

5.0

6.7

5

15

15

2030-D+

10

12.7

10

30

29

<1> Rated output capacity is calculated with a rated input voltage of 230 V.

2057-D+

20

26.8

20

61

57

<2> Rated output capacity is calculated with an input voltage of 220V.

Specification

2083-D+ 2140-D+

30 50

40

30

67

50

91

83

330 VDC

152

140

2200-D+

74

87

65

197

200

Table A-2: Power Ratings (Three-Phase 460 V Class)

2270-D+

100

120

90

273

270

2400-D+

150

174

130

394

400

Item Specification

Model

Maximum Applicable

Motor Capacity [HP]

Rating

Rating

Rated Output

Capacity [HP]

<1>

Rated Output

Capacity [kW]

<2>

Rating

Rated Output

Current (DC) [A]

Rated Input

Current (AC) [A]

Rated Output

Voltage [V]

4008-D+ 4016-D+ 4030-D+ 4043-D+ 4058-D+ 4086-D+ 4145-D+ 4210-D+ 4300-D+ 4410-D+ 4560-D+ 41040-D+

5

6.7

5

8

8

10

13.4

10

15

16

20

26.8

20

30

30

<1> Rated output capacity is calculated with a rated input voltage of 460 V.

30

40

30

45

43

40.0

54.0

40

61

58

60.0

80.0

60

91

86

100.0

134.0

100

152

145

660 VDC

150.0

174.0

130

197

210

215

250

185

280

300

300

360

270

409

410

400

500

370

561

560

750

850

630

955

1040

<2> Rated output capacity is calculated with an input voltage of 440V.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

A-3

Converter Specifications

Input

Control

Characteristics

Protection

Functions

Item

Rated Voltage Rated

Frequency

Specification

230 V Class: 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz

460 V Class: 380 to 480 VAC 50/60 Hz

Allowable Voltage

Fluctuation

-15 to +10%

Allowable Frequency

Fluctuation

±2%

Control Method

Input Power Factor

Sine-wave PWM control

Input power factor of 0.99 min. (for rated operation)

Output Voltage Accuracy

±5%

Overload Protection

Converter stops after 60 s at 150% of rated output current or after

3 s at 200% of rated output current.

Voltage Reference Range

230 V Class: 300 to 360 VDC

460 V Class: 600 to 730 VDC

Depends on the converter capacity

Carrier Frequency

Main Control Functions

6 kHz

2015-D+ to 2083-D+

4008-D+ to 4086-D+

4 kHz

2140-D+ to 2400-D+

4145-D+ to 4300-D+

2 kHz

4410-D+ to 41040-D+

Torque Limit, Cooling Fan on/off Switch, Removable Terminal

Block with Parameter Backup Function, MEMOBUS/Modbus

Comm. (RS-422/RS-485 max, 115.2 kbps)

Momentary Overcurrent

Protection

Converter stops when input current exceeds 200%.

Fuse burnout

Overloads

Overvoltage Protection

(Output)

Overvoltage Protection

(Input)

Operation stops if the fuse burns out.

Operation stops after 60 s at 150% of rated output current.

Operation stops after 3 s at 200% of rated output current.

(power supply and regeneration)

230 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 410

VDC

460 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 820

VDC

230 V class: Stops when input voltage exceeds approx. 227 VAC

460 V class: Stops when input voltage exceeds approx. 554 VAC

Undervoltage Protection

(Output)

230 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 190

VDC

460 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 380

VDC

Undervoltage Protection

(Input)

230 V class: Stops when input voltage falls below approx. 150

VAC

460 V class: Stops when input voltage falls below approx. 300

VAC

Momentary Power Loss

Ride-Thru

Immediately stop after Momentary Power Loss is detected.

Power Supply Frequency

Fault

Operation stops for a deviation of ±6 Hz or more from the rated input frequency.

Heatsink Overheat

Protection

Thermistor

Ground Protection

DC Bus Charge LED

Electronic circuit protection <1>

Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V

<1> Ground protection cannot be provided when the impedance of the ground fault path is too low, or when the converter is powered up while a ground fault is present at the output.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

A-4

Item Specification

Area of Use

Indoors

Ambient Temperature

IP00/Open Type enclosure: -10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F)

Humidity

95 RH% or less (no condensation)

Environment

Vibration/Shock

Storage Temperature

Altitude

Protection Design

10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s

2

, 20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s

2

(2015-D+ to 2140-

D+, 4008-D+ to 4145-D+)

10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s

2

20 to 55 Hz at 2.0 m/s

2

(2200-D+ to 2400-

D+, 4210-D+ to 4560-D+)

10 to 20 Hz at 5.9 m/s

2

, 20 to 55 Hz at 2.0 m/s

2

(41040-D+

-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)

1000 m (3281 ft.) or lower, up to 3000 m (9843 ft.) with derating.

IP00/Open Type enclosure

IP20/Open Type enclosure

Safety Standard

UL508C, IEC/EN61800-5-1, IEC/EN61800-3, CSA

<1> Ground protection cannot be provided when the impedance of the ground fault path is too low, or when the converter is powered up while a ground fault is present at the output.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

A-5

Heat Loss Data

Model

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

4008-D+

4016-D+

4030-D+

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

61

91

152

197

8

15

30

45

280

409

561

955

Rated Amps (A)

152

197

273

394

15

30

61

91

Table A-3: Heat Loss

Heatsink Loss (W)

230 V Class

93

167

319

380

666

1193

1616

1918

460 V Class

83

158

314

263

647

1092

1303

1969

2864

2477

3705

6103

Interior Unit Loss

(W)

37

58

103

109

201

334

467

695

997

1323

1852

3098

38

57

101

134

245

464

619

776

Total Loss (W)

120

216

417

372

848

1426

1770

2664

3861

3799

5557

9201

131

224

420

514

911

1657

2235

2694

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

A-6

Derating Data

The converter can be operated at above the rated temperature, altitude, and default carrier frequency by derating the converter capacity.

Temperature Derating

To ensure the maximum performance life, the converter output current must be derated as shown in

Figure A-1 when the converter is installed in areas with high ambient temperature or if converters are mounted side-by-side in a cabinet. In order to ensure reliable converter overload protection, set parameters L8-35 according to the installation conditions.

Parameter Settings

If the ambient temperature is higher than the rating or if converters are installed side by side in the control panel, you must set the L8-12 and L8-35 parameters according to the installation conditions.

Derate the output current according to Figure A-1.

Parameter

Code

L8-12

Parameter Name

Ambient Temperature

Setting

Function

Lets the user create a set of default settings for a User

Initialization.

L8-35 Installation Method

Selection

0 IP00/IP20/Open-

Chassis Enclosure

1 Side-by-Side

Mounting

3 Finless converter or External

Heatsink

Installation

Range

-10°C – +50°C

0, 1, 3

Initial

Value

40

Set by o2-04

Setting 0: IP00/IP20/Open-Chassis Enclosure

Converter operation between -10°C and +50°C allows 100% continuous current without derating.

Setting 1: Side-by-Side Mounting

Converter operation between -10°C and +30°C allows 100% continuous current without derating.

Operation between +30°C and +50°C requires output current derating.

Setting 3: External Heatsink Installation

Converter operation between -10°C and +40°C allows 100% continuous current without derating.

Operation between +40°C and +50°C requires output current derating.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

A-7

Figure A-1: Ambient Temperature and Installation Method Derating

Altitude Derating

Standard ratings are valid for installation altitudes up to 1000 m. For installations from 1000 m to

3000 m, the converter rated voltage and the rated output current must be derated for 1% per 100 m.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

A-8

A p p e n d i x

B

Parameter List

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-2

This page intentionally left blank.

Parameter Groups

Parameter

Group

A1

Name

Initialization Parameters

A2 b1 b4

C1

C6

H1

H2

H3

C7 d8

F4

F5

User Parameters

Operation Mode Selection

Timer Function

Acceleration and

Deceleration Times

Carrier Frequency

DC Bus Voltage Control

DC Bus Voltage Reference

Analog Monitor Card (AO-A3)

Digital Monitor Card (DO-A3)

Multi-Function Digital Inputs

Multi-Function Relay Outputs

Multi-Function Analog Inputs

Page

B-4

B-5

B-5

B-6

B-7

B-7

B-8

B-9

B-9

B-10

B-11

B-12

B-14 o2

U3

U4

-o3 o4

U1

U2

Parameter

Group

H4

L2

L5

L8 o1

Name

Multi-Function Analog

Outputs

Momentary Power Loss Ride-

Thru

Fault Restart

Drive Protection

Digital Operator Display

Selection

Digital Operator Keypad

Functions

Copy Function

Maintenance Monitor Settings

Operation Status Monitors

Fault Trace

Fault History

Maintenance Monitors

--

Page

B-15

B-16

B-17

B-18

B-20

B-21

B-22

B-22

B-24

B-27

B-29

B-30

--

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-3

Parameter Tables

A: Initialization Parameters

The A parameter group creates the operating environment for the converter. This includes the parameter Access Level, Control Method, Password, User Parameters and more.

: Indicates that the parameter setting can be changed while the converter is operating.

A1: Initialization

Parameter

Code

Parameter Name Function

A1-00 <1> Select Language

0 English

1 Japanese

2 Chinese

A1-01

A1-03

Language Selection

Access Level

0 Operation Only

Access Level Selection

View and set A1-01 and A1-04.

UX-XX parameters can also be viewed.

1 User Parameters

User Parameters (access to a set of parameters selected by the user, A2-01 to A2-32)

2 Advanced Level

Init Parameters

0 No Initialize

1110User Initial

Advanced Access (access to view and set all parameters)

Selects a method to initialize the parameters.

No initialization

User Initialize (parameter values must be stored using parameter o2-03)

A1-04

A1-05

22202-Wire Initial

33303-Wire Initial

2-Wire initialization

3-Wire initialization

5550oPE4 error reset

oPE04 error reset

Enter Password When the value set into A1-04 does not match the value set into

A1-05, parameters A1-01 through

A1-03, A1-06, and A2-01 through

A2-33 cannot be changed.

Select Password When the value set into A1-04 does not match the value set into

A1-05, parameters A1-01 through

A1-03, A1-06, and A2-01 through

A2-33 cannot be changed.

Range

0, 1, 7

0–2

0, 1110, 2220, 3330,

5550

0–9999

0–9999

2

0

0

0

Initial

Value

0

<1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the converter is initialized.

A2: User Parameters

Parameter

Code

A2-01

Parameter Name

User Param 1

Function

Recently edited parameters are listed here. The user can also select parameters to appear here for quicker access.

Range

A1-00 to o4-19

Initial

Value

b1-18

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-4

Parameter

Code

A2-02

A2-03

Parameter Name

User Param 2

User Param 3

A2-04 to

A2-32

User Param 4 to 32

A2-33 User Parms Sel

0

1

Disabled

Enabled

Function Range

Recently edited parameters are listed here. The user can also select parameters to appear here for quicker access.

Recently edited parameters are listed here. The user can also select parameters to appear here for quicker access.

Recently edited parameters are listed here. The user can also select parameters to appear here for quicker access.

Determines whether recently edited parameters are saved to the second half of the User

Parameters (A2-17 to A2-32) for quicker access.

Parameters A2-01 to A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a list of User Parameters.

Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will be saved to A2-17 through A2-32 for quicker access.

A1-00 to o4-19

A1-00 to o4-19

A1-00 to o4-19

0, 1

b: Application

Application parameters configure the source of the operation mode selection.

b1: Operation Mode Selection

Parameter

Code

b1-02

Parameter Name Function

b1-06

Run Source 1

0 Digital operator

1 Digital Inputs

2 Communication

3 Option PCB

Cntl Input Scans

1 Scan

2 Scans

Range

Run Command Selection 1

Digital operator

Digital input terminals

MEMOBUS/Modbus communications

Option PCB

Digital Input Reading - Defines how the digital inputs are read.

The inputs are acted upon every 1 ms or 2 ms depending upon the setting.

Input status is read once and processed immediately (for quicker response)

Input is read twice and processed only if the status is the same in both readings (robust against noisy signals)

0–3

0, 1

Initial

Value

b1-02 b8-01

--

0

Initial

Value

1

1

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-5

Parameter

Code

b1-08

Parameter Name

RUN dur PRG Mode b1-17

0 Run

Disabled@PRG

1 ModeRun

Enabled@PRG

2 Prg only @ Stop

Run Cmd @ Pwr On b1-18

0

1

Reference Sel

0

1

2

Cycle Ext Run

Accept Ext Run

Operator

Analog Input

Serial Com

3 Option PCB

7 AutoMode1

8 AutoMode2

Function Range

Allow the converter to run while in

Programming Mode.

Run command is not accepted while in Programming Mode.

Run command is accepted while in

Programming Mode.

Prohibit entering Programming

Mode during run.

Run Command at Power Up -

Determines whether an external

Run command that is active during power up will start the converter.

Disregarded. A new Run

Command must be issued.

Allowed. Converter will start immediately if Run Command is present at power up.

Voltage Reference Source - Sets the input source for the voltage reference.

Digital operator

Control circuit terminal (analog input)

MEMOBUS/Modbus communications

Option card

Input voltage based control 1

Input voltage based control 2

0–2

0, 1

0–3, 7, 8

b4: Timer Function

Parameter

Code

b4-01

Parameter Name

Delay-ON Timer b4-02 Delay-OFF Timer

Function Range

Timer Function On-Delay Time

Sets the on-delay times for a digital timer output (H2-xx=12).

The output is triggered by a digital input programmed to H1-xx=18.

Timer Function Off-Delay Time

Sets the off-delay times for a digital timer output (H2-xx=12).

The output is triggered by a digital input programmed to H1-xx=18.

0.0–3000.0 sec

0.0–3000.0 sec

Initial

Value

0

0

0

Initial

Value

0.0

0.0

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-6

C: Tuning

Tuning parameters set the voltage increase time, voltage decrease time, carrier frequency, and DC bus voltage control.

C1: Voltage Increase and Decrease Times

Parameter

Code

C1-20

Parameter Name

Vref Inc Ramp t

Function

C1-21 Vref Dec Ramp t

Voltage Increase Time

Sets the output voltage increase time in seconds.

Set the time to increase from 0% to 100%.

460 V Class: 800 V/C1-20 (V/s)

230 V Class: 400 V/C1-20 (V/s)

Voltage Decrease Time

Sets the output voltage decrease time in seconds.

Set the time to decrease from

100% to 0%.

460 V Class: 800 V/C1-21 (V/s)

230 V Class: 400 V/C1-21 (V/s)

Range

0.0–100.0 sec

0.0–100.0 sec

Initial

Value

10.0

10.0

C6: Carrier Frequency

Parameter

Code

C6-02

Parameter Name Function

C6-03

CarrierFreq Sel

1

2

3

F

Fc = 2.0 kHz

Fc = 4.0 kHz

Fc = 6.0 kHz

Program

CarrierFreq Max

Carrier Frequency Selection

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

If you change this setting carelessly, the converter may be damaged.

2 kHz

4 kHz

6 kHz <1>

User-defined <1>

Carrier Frequency Upper Limit

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

Set the carrier frequency that is specified by the manufacturer.

If you change this setting carelessly, the converter may be damaged.

<1> This parameter is not available in model 41040-D+.

<2> Default setting is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection.

--

Range

1–3, F

Initial

Value

<2>

--

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-7

C7: DC Bus Voltage Control

Parameter

Code

C7-01

C7-02

C7-03

C7-12

C7-41

C7-42

C7-43

C7-44

Parameter Name

AVR P Gain

AVR I Time

AVR Delay Time

React I Bias Sel

0

1

Damp Gain 2

Id Bias Gain

Vac Bias Adj Sel

0

Disabled

Enable

Standard

1 Start offset adjustment

2 Offset adjustment not required

Damping Gain 3

Function Range

Initial

Value

20.00

DC Bus Voltage Control (Avr)

Proportional Gain

Sets the proportional gain for DC bus voltage control (Avr).

DC Bus Voltage Control (Avr)

Integral Time

Sets the integral time for DC bus voltage control (Avr).

DC Bus Voltage Control (Avr)

Primary Delay Time Constant

Sets the primary delay time constant for DC bus voltage control (Avr).

Reactive Current Reference Bias

Automatic Calculation Selection

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value. Sets whether to automatically calculate the leading current compensation for the control process to compensate the leading current in the reactive current reference so that the leading current becomes 0.

Disabled

Automatically calculate the reactive current reference bias.

Gain for Active Damping 2

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

Gain for Automatic Compensation of Leading Current

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

It is used to make fine adjustments to the power factor.

Input Voltage Offset Adjustment

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value. This parameter is for factory setting.

If the setting is not correct, the converter may be damaged.

Standard

The parameter returns to 0 after it is set.

The parameter returns to 0 after it is set.

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

1.0–300.00

0.000–10.000 sec 0.500

0.000–0.500 sec

0, 1

0.000

1

0.000–10.000 0.000

0.0–1000.0%

0–2

0.00–1.00

100.0

0

0.00

<1> This parameter is not available in model 41040-D+.

<2> Default setting is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-8

Parameter

Code

C7-47

Parameter Name Function Range

C7-50

C7-51

L1 Compensation

Conv READY delay

L2 Compensation

Adjustment Reactor 1

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

Set this parameter to the value that is specified by the manufacturer when using a filter such as the DC5.

Converter Ready ON Delay Time

Sets the delay time to turn on the

Converter Ready signal (H2-xx=6).

Adjustment Reactor 2

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

Set this parameter to the value that is specified by the manufacturer when using a filter such as the DC5.

00.000–65.000

0–500 ms

00.000–65.000

<1> This parameter is not available in model 41040-D+.

<2> Default setting is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection.

d: References

Reference parameters set the value of the DC bus voltage reference.

d8: DC Bus Voltage Reference

Parameter

Code

d8-01

Parameter Name

Vpn Volt Ref

Function Range

DC Bus Voltage Reference

Sets the DC bus voltage reference in volts.

Magnetek recommends setting a value that is 1.5 times the set value of the Power Supply Voltage

(U1-54).

230V: 300–360 V

460V: 600–730 V

Initial

Value

<2>

0

<2>

Initial

Value

230V:

330

460V:

660

F: Options

F parameters program the converter for communication options and to function with option cards.

F4: Analog Monitor Card (AO-A3)

Parameter

Code

F4-01

Parameter Name

AO Ch1 Select

Function

F4-02 AO Ch1 Gain

Range

Terminal V1 Monitor Selection

Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V1. Set this parameter to the last three digits of the desired Ux-xx monitor. Some

U parameters are available only in certain control modes.

Terminal V1 Monitor Gain

Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V1.

000–408

-999.9–999.9%

Initial

Value

0

100.0

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-9

Parameter

Code

F4-03

Parameter Name

AO Ch2 Select

F4-04

F4-05

F4-06

F4-07

F4-08

AO Ch2 Gain

AO Ch1 Bias

AO Ch2 Bias

AO Opt Level Ch1

0 0-10 VDC

1 -10 +10 VDC

AO Opt Level Ch2

0 0-10 VDC

1 -10 +10 VDC

Function Range

Terminal V2 Monitor Selection

Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V2. Set this parameter to the last three digits of the desired Ux-xx monitor. Some

U parameters are available only in certain control modes.

Terminal V2 Monitor Gain

Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V2.

Terminal V1 Monitor Bias

Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V1.

Terminal V2 Monitor Bias

Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V2.

Terminal V1 Signal Level

0 to 10 V

-10 to 10 V

Terminal V2 Signal Level

0 to 10 V

-10 to 10 V

000–408

-999.9–999.9%

-999.9–999.9%

-999.9–999.9%

0, 1

0, 1

Initial

Value

0

50.0

0.0

0.0

0

0

F5: Digital Output Card (DO-A3)

Parameter

Code

F5-01

F5-02

F5-03

F5-04

F5-05

F5-06

F5-07

F5-08

Parameter Name

DO Ch1 Select

DO Ch2 Select

DO Ch3 Select

DO Ch4 Select

DO Ch5 Select

DO Ch6 Select

DO Ch7 Select

DO Ch8 Select

Function Range

Terminal P1-PC Output Selection 0–160

Terminal P2-PC Output Selection 0–160

Terminal P3-PC Output Selection 0–160

Terminal P4-PC Output Selection 0–160

Terminal P5-PC Output Selection 0–160

Terminal P6-PC Output Selection 0–160

Terminal M1-M2 Output Selection 0–160

Terminal M3-M4 Output Selection 0–160

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

Initial

Value

The digital output card parameters set the function for contact output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and photocoupler output terminals P1 through P6.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-10

H: Multi-Function Terminals

H parameters assign functions to the multi-function input and output terminals.

H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs

Parameter

Code

H1-01

Parameter Name

Term S1 Func Sel

Function

H1-02

H1-03

H1-04

H1-05

H1-06

H1-07

H1-08

Term S2 Func Sel

Term S3 Func Sel

Term S4 Func Sel

Term S5 Func Sel

Term S6 Func Sel

Term S7 Func Sel

Term S8 Func Sel

Multi-Function Digital Input

Terminal S1 Function Selection

Multi-Function Digital Input

Terminal S2 Function Selection

Multi-Function Digital Input

Terminal S3 Function Selection

Multi-Function Digital Input

Terminal S4 Function Selection

Multi-Function Digital Input

Terminal S5 Function Selection

Multi-Function Digital Input

Terminal S6 Function Selection

Multi-Function Digital Input

Terminal S7 Function Selection

Multi-Function Digital Input

Terminal S8 Function Selection

Range

1–67

1–67

0–67

0–67

0–67

0–67

0–67

0–67

The H1 parameters assign a function to the multi-function digital inputs S1 to S8.

NOTE: Set unused terminals to F.

H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections

H1-xx

Setting

1

Function LCD Display

LOCAL/REMOTE selection

Local/Remote Sel

8 Ext BaseBlk N.O.

Description

Open: REMOTE (parameter settings determine the source of the frequency Reference 1 or 2

(b1-01, b1-02 or b1-15, b1-16)

Closed: LOCAL, Frequency reference and Run command are input from the digital operator

Closed: No converter output

9

C

Baseblock command (N.O.)

Baseblock command (N.C.)

Analog terminal input selection

Ext BaseBlk N.C.

Term A2 Enable

Open: No converter output

F

14

18

1B

Through mode

Fault reset

Timer function input

Term Not Used

Fault Reset

Timer function

Program Lockout Program Lockout

Open: Function assigned by H3-14 is disabled.

Closed: Function assigned by H3-14 is enabled.

Select this setting when using the terminal in a pass-through mode.

Closed: Resets faults if the cause is cleared and the Run command is removed.

Triggers the timer set up by parameters b4-01 and b4-02. Must be set in conjunction with the timer function output (H2-xx = 12).

Open: Parameters cannot be edited (except for

U1-01 if the reference source is assigned to the digital operator).

Closed: Parameters can be edited and saved.

F

F

14H

F

8H

Initial

Value

4B

4C

24H

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-11

H1-xx

Setting

24 to 27

2C to 2F

47

4B

Function LCD Display

External Fault

Node Setup

Run Command

(2-wire Sequence)

External fault

24: NO/ Always Det,

Coast to Stop

25: NC/Always Det,

Coast to Stop

26: NO/During RUN,

Coast to Stop

27: NC/During RUN,

Coast to Stop

2C: NO/Always Det,

Alarm Only

2D: NC/Always Det,

Alarm Only

2E: NO/ During RUN,

Alarm Only

2F: NC/During RUN,

Alarm Only

Node SetUp

Run Command3

4C

67

Stop Command

(2-wire Sequence)

Communications test mode

Stop Command3

Comm Test Mode

Description

24: N.O., Always detected, coast to stop

25: N.C., Always detected, coast to stop

26: N.O., During run, coast to stop

27: N.C., During run, coast to stop

2C: N.O., Always detected, alarm only (continue running)

2D: N.C., Always detected, alarm only (continue running)

2E: N.O., During run, alarm only (continue running)

2F: N.C., During run, alarm only (continue running)

Closed: Node setup for SI-S3 enabled.

Closed: Run

NOTE: To start operation, close the Stop

Command (4C) and then open the

Run Command signal. After operation has started, it will continue even if the Run Command signal is opened.

Open: Stop.

NOTE: To stop operation, open the Stop

Command signal.

Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-422/RS-485 interface. Displays “PASS” if the test completes successfully.

H2: Multi-Function Relay Outputs

Parameter

Code

H2-01

Parameter Name

M1-M2 Func Sel

Function

H2-02

H2-03

P1/PC Func Sel

P2/PC Func Sel

Range

Terminal M1-M2 function selection

(relay)

Terminal M3-M4 Function

Selection (Relay)

Terminal M5-M6 Function

Selection (Relay)

0–160

0–160

0–160

Initial

Value

25H

26H

6H

Refer to H2:Multi-Function Relay Output Settings on page B-12 for a description of setting values.

NOTE: Set unused terminals to F.

H2 Multi-Function Relay Output Settings

H2-xx

Setting

0

Function

During run

LCD Display

During RUN 1

6 Ready Drive Ready

Description

Closed: A Run command is active or voltage is output.

Closed: Power up is complete and the converter is ready to accept a Run command.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-12

2F

30

3B

1E

20

24

25

26

27

12

1B

1D

8

E

F

H2-xx

Setting

7

10

11

Function LCD Display

DC bus undervoltage

During baseblock

(N.O.)

Fault

Through mode

DC Bus Undervolt

BaseBlk 1

Fault

Not Used

Minor fault

Fault reset command active

Minor Fault

Reset Cmd Active

Timer output

During baseblock

(N.C.)

Timer Output

BaseBlk 2

During

Regeneration

Regenerating

Restart enabled Dur Flt Restart

Drive overheat pre-alarm (oH)

OH Prealarm

Fuse Blowout

Detection

FUA/FUD Detect

During Run 1

During MC ON

Converter

Overload Warning

(oL2)

Maintenance

Period

During RUN 1

MC On

OL2 Pre-alarm

Maintenance

During torque limit Torque Limit

Alarm 2 Minor Fault 2

3C LOCAL/REMOTE status

Local

4D

60 oH Pre-alarm time limit

Internal cooling fan alarm

100 to 160 Function 0 to 60 with inverse output

OH Pre-Alarm

Fan Alrm Det

--

Description

Closed: DC bus voltage is below the Uv trip level set in L2-05.

Closed: Converter has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage).

Closed: Fault occurred.

Set this value when using the terminal in the pass-through mode.

Closed: An alarm has been triggered.

Closed: A command has been entered to clear a fault via the input terminals or from the serial network.

Closed: Timer output.

Open: Converter has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage).

Closed: Motor is regenerating energy into the converter.

Closed: An automatic restart is performed

Closed: Heatsink temperature exceeds the parameter L8-02 value.

Closed: Fuse burnout detected.

Closed: The drive is ready to operate.

Closed: The magnetic contactor is closed.

Closed: There is an overload warning.

Closed: It is time to perform maintenance on the cooling fan, electrolytic capacitor, and inrush prevention relay.

Closed: When the torque limit has been reached.

Closed: Alarm occurred (excluding Uv, AUv, Fdv,

SrC, and PAUv).

NOTE: This setting is available in converter software versions PRG:902003 or later.

Open: REMOTE

Closed: LOCAL

Closed: oH pre-alarm time limit has passed.

Closed: Internal cooling fan alarm

Inverts the output switching of the multi-function output functions. Set the last two digits of 1XX to reverse the output signal of that specific function.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-13

H3: Multi-Function Analog Inputs

Parameter

Code

H3-01

Parameter Name Function

H3-02

H3-03

H3-04

H3-05

H3-06

H3-07

H3-08

H3-09

H3-10

H3-11

H3-12

H3-13

Range

Term A1 Level Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection 0, 1

0 0-10V, (LowLim=0)

0 to 10 V

1 0-10V, (BipolRef)

-10 to 10 V

Term A1 FuncSel Terminal A1 Function Selection

Sets the function of terminal A1.

Terminal A1 Gain

F–19

-999.9–999.9%

Terminal A1 Bias

Terminal A1 Gain Setting

Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 10 V is input at terminal A1.

Terminal A1 Bias Setting

Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 0 V is input at terminal A1.

-999.9–999.9%

0, 1 Term A3 Signal Terminal V1 Signal Level

0 0-10V (LowLim=0)

0 to 10 V

1 0-10V (BipolRef)

Terminal A3 Sel

-10 to 10 V

Terminal A3 Function Selection

Sets the function of terminal A3.

F–19

Terminal A3 Gain

Terminal A3 Bias

Terminal A3 Gain Setting

Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-06 when 10 V is input at terminal A3.

Terminal A3 Bias Setting

Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-06 when 0 V is input at terminal A3.

-999.9–999.9%

-999.9–999.9%

Term A2 Level Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection 0, 1

0 0-10V, (LowLim=0)

0 to 10 V

1 0-10V, (BipolRef)

-10 to 10 V

2 4-20 mA

4 to 20 mA

3 0-20 mA

0 to 20 mA

NOTE: Use DIP switch S1 to set input terminal A2 for a current or a voltage input signal.

Term A2 FuncSel F–19

Terminal A2 Gain

Terminal A2 Bias

A1/A2 Filter T

Terminal A2 Function Selection

Sets the function of terminal A2.

Terminal A2 Gain Setting

Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 10 V (20 mA) is input at terminal A2.

Terminal A2 Bias Setting

Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 0 V (0 or 4 mA) is input at terminal A2.

Analog Input Filter Time Constant

Sets a primary delay filter time constant for terminals A1, A2, and

A3. Used for electrical noise filtering.

-999.9–999.9%

-999.9–999.9%

0.00–2.00 sec

Initial

Value

0

F

100.0

0.0

0

F

100.0

0.0

0

F

100.0

0.0

0.03

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-14

Parameter

Code

H3-14

Parameter Name

A1/A2 Sel

1 A1 Available

2 A2 Available

3 A1/A2 Available

4 A3 Available

5 A1/A3 Available

6 A2/A3 Available

7 All Available

Function Range

Analog Input Terminal Enable

Selection

Determines which analog input terminals will be enabled when a digital input programmed for

“Analog input enable” (H1-xx = C) is activated.

Terminal A1 only

Terminal A2 only

Terminals A1 and A2 only

Terminal A3 only

Terminals A1 and A3

Terminals A2 and A3

All terminals enabled

1–7

H3 Analog Output Settings

H3-xx

Setting

F

Function

Through mode

LCD Display

Through mode

10

12

19

Power Supply

Side Active

Current Limit

Regeneration side

Active Current

Limit

Voltage

Reference

Motoring I Limit

Regen I limit

DC V Reference

Initial

Value

7

Description

Set this value when using the terminal in the pass-through mode.

10 V = Converter rated current

10 V = Converter rated current

10 V = Maximum value in d8-01

H4: Analog Outputs

Parameter

Code

H4-01

Parameter Name

Term FM FuncSel

Initial

Value

157

H4-02

H4-03

H4-04

Terminal FM Gain

Terminal FM Bias

Terminal AM Sel

Function

Terminal FM Monitor Selection

Selects the data to be output through terminal FM. Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in Ux-xx. For example, enter “153” for U1-53.

Terminal FM Monitor Gain

Sets the signal level at terminal

FM that is equal to 100% of the selected monitor value.

Terminal FM Monitor Bias

Sets the signal level at terminal

FM that is equal to 0% of the selected monitor value.

Terminal AM Monitor Selection

Selects the data to be output through terminal AM. Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in Ux-xx. For example, enter “153” for U1-53.

Range

000–408

-999.9–999.9%

-999.9–999.9%

000–408

100.0

0.0

155

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-15

Parameter

Code

H4-05

Parameter Name

Terminal AM Gain

H4-06

H4-07

H4-08

Terminal AM Bias

Level Select1

0 0-10 VDC

1 -10 +10 VDC

2 4-20 mA

AO Level Select2

Function

Terminal AM Monitor Gain

Sets the signal level at terminal

AM that is equal to 100% of the selected monitor value.

Terminal AM Monitor Bias

Sets the signal level at terminal

AM that is equal to 0% of the selected monitor value.

Terminal FM Signal Level

Selection

Sets the signal level at terminal

FM.

0 to 10 V

-10 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA

Terminal AM Signal Level

Selection

Sets the signal level at terminal

AM.

0 to 10 V

-10 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA

Range

-999.9–999.9%

-999.9–999.9%

0–2

0–2

Initial

Value

50.0

0.0

0

0

0 0-10 VDC

1 -10 +10 VDC

2 4-20 mA

L: Protection Function

Protection function parameters set momentary power loss processing, fault retries, and hardware protection.

L2: Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru

Parameter

Code

L2-01

Parameter Name Function Range

L2-02

L2-05

L2-21

PwrL Selection

0

1

Disabled

Enbl with Timer

Momentary Power Loss Operation

Selection

Disabled. Converter trips on Uv1 fault when power is lost.

Recover within the time set in L2-

02. Uv1 will be detected if power loss is longer than L2-02.

2 Enbl whl CPU act

Recover as long as CPU has power. Uv1 is not detected.

PwrL Ridethru t Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru

Time

Sets the Power Loss Ride-Thru time. Enabled only when L2-01 = 1 or 3.

PUV Det Level

AC UV Level

Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv)

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

AUv Detection Level

Sets the undervoltage detection level for power supply voltage (AC) in volts.

<2> Default setting is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection.

0–2

0.0–25.5 sec

230 V: 150–210 V

460 V: 300–420 V

230 V: 100–200 V

460 V: 200–400 V

Initial

Value

0

<2>

230 V:

190

460 V:

380

230 V:

150

460 V:

300

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-16

Parameter

Code

L2-35

Parameter Name Function Range

L2-36

L2-37

V Resonance Lvl vrE Detect time vrE Detect Count

Momentary vrE Detection Level

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value. Protects the converter against momentary increase of power supply voltage caused by power supply resonance or other factors.

A vrE is detected when the detected power supply voltage exceeds the value that is set in L2-

35. Set the effective value in L2-

35.

Faults are not detected if you set this parameter to 0.

Power Supply Resonance

Detection Time

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

The converter will stop temporarily, if a power supply resonance is detected (rvE).

The converter will stop completely, if a power supply resonance is detected (rvE) within the time set in L2-36 in milliseconds for the number of time that is set in L2-37.

Number of Power Supply

Resonance Detection

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

The converter will stop temporarily, if a power supply resonance is detected (rvE).

The converter will stop completely, if a power supply resonance is detected (rvE) within the time set in L2-36 in milliseconds for the number of time that is set in L2-37.

230 V: 0–400 V

460 V: 0–800 V

150–1000 ms

1–10

<2> Default setting is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection.

L5: Fault Restart

Parameter

Code

L5-01

Parameter Name

Num of Restarts

Function Range

L5-02

L5-04

Restart Sel

0 Flt Outp Disabld

1 Flt Outp Enabled

Flt Reset Wait T

Number of Auto Restart Attempts

Sets the number of times the converter may attempt to restart after the following faults occur: GF, oC, oL2, ov, Uv1.

Auto Restart Fault Output

Operation Selection

Fault output not active.

Fault output active during restart attempt.

Fault Reset Interval Time

Sets the amount of time to wait between performing fault restarts.

0–10 times

0, 1

0.5–600.0 sec

Initial

Value

230 V:

277

460 V:

554

300

3

Initial

Value

0

0

10.0

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-17

Parameter

Code

L5-05

Parameter Name

Fault Reset Sel

0 Continuous

1 Use L5-04 Time

Function Range

Fault Reset Operation Selection

Continuously attempt to restart while incrementing restart counter only at a successful restart.

Attempt to restart with the interval time set in L5-04 and increment the restart counter with each attempt.

0, 1

L7: Torque Limit

Parameter

Code

L7-25

Parameter Name

Motoring I Limit

L7-26 Regen I Limit

Function Range

Active Current Limit at Power

Supply Side

Sets the limit for the active current at the power supply side.

Active Current Limit at

Regeneration Side

Sets the limit for the active current at the regeneration side.

0–200%

0–200%

L8: Drive Protection

Parameter

Code

L8-02

Parameter Name Function Range

L8-03

L8-09

OH Pre-Alarm Lvl

OH Pre-Alarm Sel

0

3

Ramp to stop

Alarm only

Grnd Flt Det Sel

Overheat Alarm Level

An overheat alarm occurs when heatsink temperature exceeds the

L8-02 level.

Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation

Selection

Ramp to stop. A fault is triggered.

Continue operation. An alarm is triggered.

Output Ground Fault Detection

Selection

50–150°C

0, 3

0, 1

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

Fan On/Off Sel L8-10

L8-11

0

1

Dur Run (OffDly)

Always On

Fan Delay Time

Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation

Selection

During run only. Fan operates only during run for L8-11 seconds after stop.

Fan always on. Cooling fan operates whenever the converter is powered up.

Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Delay

Time

Sets a delay time to shut off the cooling fan after the Run command is removed when L8-10

= 0.

<1> Default setting is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection.

0, 1

0–300 sec

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-18

Initial

Value

0

<2>

0

Initial

Value

200

200

Initial

Value

<2>

3

60

Parameter

Code

L8-12

Parameter Name Function Range

L8-35

L8-41

L8-65

L8-66

L8-67

Ambient Temp Ambient Temperature Setting

Enter the ambient temperature.

This value adjusts the oL2 detection level.

Installation Sel Installation Method Selection

0 IP00/OpenChassis

IP00/IP20/Open-Chassis

Enclosure

1 Side-by-Side

Side-by-Side mounting

3 ExternalHeatsink

External Heatsink Installation

High Cur Alm Sel

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

High Current Alarm Selection

Disabled

Vpn Ripple Sel

Enabled. An alarm is triggered at output currents above 150% of converter rated current.

Power Supply Fault Detection

Selection

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value.

Monitors the ripple of DC BUS voltage and detects Input Power

Supply Fault(PF2) when the ripple is too bad.

0 Disabled

1 Coast to Stop

2 Alarm Only

Vpn Ripple Lvl

Vpn Ripple Cnt

No detection

Stop operation (fault)

Continue operation (minor fault)

Power Supply Fault Detection

Voltage Level

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value. The main circuit DC voltage ripple is monitored in a cycle of 200 ms. If the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the ripple exceeds the value that is set in L8-

66 for the number of times that is set in L8-67, a power supply fault is detected.

Number of Times of Power Supply

Fault for Detection

There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value. The main circuit DC voltage ripple is monitored in a cycle of 200 ms. If the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the ripple exceeds the value that is set in L8-

66 for the number of times that is set in L8-67, a power supply fault is detected.

-10–50°C

0, 1, 3

0, 1

0–2

230 V: 1–200

460 V: 1–200

1–10

<1> Default setting is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection.

Initial

Value

40

<2>

0

0

230 V:

<2>

460 V:

<2>

5

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-19

Parameter

Code

L8-69

Parameter Name Function

L8-78

AC Phase Imb Det

0

1

LF3 Det Sel

0

1

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

Input Phase Loss Protection

Selection 3

Sets whether to enable or disable the protective function for the converter when there is an input phase loss.

Disabled

Enabled (Detect input phase loss and power supply imbalance.)

Module Phase Loss (LF3)

Protection

Enables phase loss protection for the input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/

L3 or R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31.

Disable

Enable

NOTE: This parameter is available in model

41040-D+.

<1> Default setting is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection.

Range

0, 1

0, 1

o: Operator-Related Settings

The o parameters set up the digital operator displays.

o1: Digital Operator Display Selection

Parameter

Code

o1-01 o1-02 o1-05 <7>

Parameter Name

User Monitor Sel

Power-On Monitor

1

2

3

4

5

Frequency Ref

FWD/REV

Output Freq

Output Current

User Monitor

LCD Contrast

Function

Drive Mode Converter Monitor

Selection

When the power supply is turned on, the operator will display the following in order: DC Bus Voltage

Reference, DC Bus Voltage

Feedback, DC Current Reference,

Power Supply Voltage, Power

Supply Frequency, and U1-xx.

The o1-01 parameter sets the item to display instead of the output voltage.

The o1-02 parameter sets the item to display at power up.

User Monitor Selection after

Power Up

Selects the information displayed on the digital operator when the power is turned on.

Output Voltage Reference

Output Voltage Feedback

Output Current

Input Voltage

User monitor item set in o1-01

LCD Contrast Control

Sets the brightness of the LCD operator.

Range

110–914

1–5

0–5

<7> Parameter is available in software versions PRG: 2003 and later (PRG: 3010 and later in 41040-D+).

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-20

Initial

Value

1

1

Initial

Value

158

1

3

o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions

Parameter

Code

o2-01

Parameter Name Function

LO/RE Key Function Selection LO/RE Key

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-06 o2-09 o2-21

Oper STOP Key

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

User Default Sel

0 No Change

1 Save User Init

2 Clear User Init

Inverter Model #

Oper Discon Det

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

--

US signal check

0 Normal

1 Start

Range

0, 1

LO/RE key switches between

LOCAL and REMOTE operation.

STOP Key Function Selection

STOP key is disabled in REMOTE operation.

STOP key is always enabled.

User Parameter Default Value

No change.

Set defaults. Saves parameter settings as default values for a

User Initialization.

Clear all. Clears the default settings that have been saved for a User Initialization.

Drive Model Selection

Enter the converter model. Setting required only if installing a new control board.

Operation Selection when Digital

Operator is Disconnected

Determines the operation when the digital operator is disconnected.

The converter continues operating if the digital operator is disconnected.

A fault is triggered (oPr) and the motor coasts to stop.

Reserved

Converter Check

Sets the operation for Converter

Capacity Setting Fault (oPE01).

Set this parameter to 1 to reset an oPE01 fault without cycling the power supply.

Standard

Recheck converter (The parameter returns to 0 after it is set.)

0, 1

0–2

--

0, 1

--

0, 1

--

0

0

1

1

0

Initial

Value

1

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-21

o3: Copy Function

Parameter

Code

o3-01

Parameter Name

o3-02

Function

COPY SELECT

0 COPY SELECT

Copy Function Select

No action

1 INV → OP READ

Read parameters from the converter, saving them onto the digital operator.

2 OP → INV WRITE

Copy parameters from the digital operator, writing them to the converter.

3 OP ←→ INV

VERIFY

Verify parameter settings on the converter to check if they match the data saved on the operator.

Read Allowable

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

Copy Allowed Selection

Read operation prohibited

Read operation allowed

Range

0–3

0, 1

o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings

Parameter

Code

o4-01

Parameter Name

DrvElapsTimeCnt

Function

o4-02 o4-03 o4-05 o4-07

ElapsTimeCntSet

0 Power-On Time

1 Running Time

FanElapsTimeCn

BusCap Maint Set

ChrgCircMaintSet

Range

Cumulative Operation Time

Setting

Sets the value for the cumulative operation time of the converter in units of 10 h.

Cumulative Operation Time

Selection

Logs power-on time

Logs operation time when the converter output is active (output operation time).

Cooling Fan Operation Time

Setting

Sets the value of the fan operation time monitor U4-03 in units of 10 h.

Capacitor Maintenance Setting

Sets the value of the Maintenance

Monitor for the capacitors. See U4-

05 to check when the capacitors may need to be replaced.

DC Bus Pre-Charge Relay

Maintenance Setting DC Bus Pre-

Charge Relay Maintenance

Setting

Sets the value of the Maintenance

Monitor for the soft charge bypass relay.

See U4-06 to check when the bypass relay may need to be replaced.

0–9999 H

0, 1

0–9999 H

0–150%

0–150%

Initial

Value

1

0

Initial

Value

0

0

0

0

0

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-22

Parameter

Code

o4-11

Parameter Name

Fault Data Init

0 No Reset

o4-12

1 Reset

kWh Monitor Init

0 No Reset

1 Reset

o4-13 o4-19

Run Counter Init

0 No Reset

1 Reset

Cost per 1 kWh

Function Range

U2, U3 Initialization

U2-xx and U3-xx monitor data is not reset when the converter is initialized (A1-03).

U4-10 and U4-11 monitor data is reset when the converter is initialized (A1-03).

kWh Monitor Initialization

U4-10 and U4-11 monitor data is not reset when the converter is initialized (A1-03).

Enabled. An alarm is triggered at output currents above 150% of converter rated current.

Number of Run Commands

Counter Initialization

Number of Run commands counter is not reset when the converter is initialized (A1-03).

Number of Run commands counter is reset when the converter is initialized (A1-03).

Power Unit Price

This parameter is used to calculate the power rate that is displayed for

User Monitors U9-07 through U9-

14. Set the price per 1 kWh.

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

000.00–650.00

Initial

Value

0

0

0

000.00

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-23

U: Monitors

Monitor parameters allow the user to view converter status, fault information, and other data concerning converter operation.

U1: Operation Status Monitors

Parameter

Code

U1-10

Parameter Name

Input Term Sts

Function

Input Terminal Status

Displays the input terminal status.

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

Unit

--

U1-11 Output Term Sts Output Terminal Status

Displays the output terminal status.

No signal output available

--

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-24

Parameter

Code

U1-12

Parameter Name

Int Ctl Sts 1

Function

Drive Status

Verifies the converter operation status.

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

Unit

--

U1-13

U1-14

U1-15

U1-18

Term A1 Level

Term A2 Level

Term A3 Level

OPE Error Code

U1-19 Transmit Err

Terminal A1 Input Level

Displays the signal level to analog input terminal A1.

Terminal A2 Input Level

Displays the signal level to analog input terminal A2.

Terminal A3 Input Level

Displays the signal level to analog input terminal A3.

oPE Fault Parameter

Displays the parameter number that caused the oPE02 or oPE08 operation error.

MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Code

Displays the contents of a

MEMOBUS/Modbus error.

10 V: 100%

10 V: 100%

10 V: 100%

No signal output available

No signal output available

0.1%

0.1%

0.1%

--

--

U1-25

U1-26

U1-27

CPU 1 SW Number

CPU 2 SW Number

MessageID (OPR)

Software Number (Flash)

FLASH ID

Software No. (ROM)

ROM ID

Message ID (OPR)

Shows the message ID number for

OPE.

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

--

--

--

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-25

Parameter

Code

U1-28

U1-29

U1-51

U1-52

U1-53

U1-54

U1-55

U1-56

U1-57

U1-58

U1-59

U1-60

U1-61

U1-62

U1-63

Parameter Name

MessageID (INV)

CPU 3 SW Number

DC V Command

DC V Feedback

DC Current

AC Voltage

AC Current

DC Power

AC Power

AC Frequency

AC Current Ref

Power Factor

Active Current

Reactive Current

DC Volt SFS Out

Function

Message ID (INV)

Shows the message ID number for

INV.

Software No. (PWM)

PWM ID

NOTE: This parameter is available in 41040-D+.

DC Bus Voltage Reference

(Before SFS)

Shows the DC bus voltage reference.

DC Bus Voltage Feedback

Shows the DC bus voltage feedback value.

DC Bus Side Current

Shows an estimated value of the bus current on the DC side.

Power Supply Voltage

Shows the power supply voltage.

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

No signal output available

230 V

10 V: 400 V

460 V

10 V: 800 V

230 V

10 V: 400 V

460 V

10 V: 800 V

10 V: Rated Output

Current

230 V

10 V: 400 V

460 V

10 V: 800 V

10 V: Rated Input

Current

Power Supply Current

Shows the current on the power supply side.

DC Bus Side Power

Shows the power on the DC side.

Power Supply Side Power

Shows the power on the power supply side.

Power Supply Frequency

Shows the frequency on the power supply side.

Power Supply Current Reference

Shows the current reference on the power supply side.

Power Factor

Shows the power factor.

Active Current

Shows the active current.

Reactive Current

Shows the reactive current.

DC Bus Voltage Reference (After

SFS)

Shows the DC bus voltage reference after the soft starter.

10 V: Rated power

(output side)

10 V: Rated power

(input side)

10 V: Rated

Frequency

10 V: Rated Input

Current

10 V: 100%

10 V: 100.0%

10 V: 100.0%

230 V

10 V: 400 V

460 V

10 V: 800 V

Unit

--

--

1 V

1 V

1 A

1 V

1 A

1 kW

1 kW

0.1 Hz

1 A

1%

0.1%

0.1%

1 V

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-26

Parameter

Code

U1-64

Parameter Name

AVR Input

U1-65

U1-66

U1-67

U1-72

AVR Output

Voltage Ref (Vq)

Voltage Ref (Vd)

AC Supply Status

Function

Avr Input (Voltage Deviation)

Shows the Avr input.

Avr Output

Shows the Avr output.

Control Voltage Reference (Vq)

Shows the control voltage reference (Vq) in the converter for the current control on the power supply side.

Control Voltage Reference (Vd)

Shows the control voltage reference (Vd) in the converter for the current control on the power supply side.

Input Power Supply Information

Shows information on the input power supply.

Analog Output

Level

230 V

10 V: 400 V

460 V

10 V: 800 V

10 V: 100.0%

230 V

10 V: 400 V

460 V

10 V: 800 V

230 V

10 V: 400 V

460 V

10 V: 800 V

No signal output available

Unit

1 V

0.01%

1 V

1 V

--

U2: Fault Trace

Parameter

Code

U2-01

Parameter Name

Current Fault

U2-02

U2-11

Last Fault

Input Term Sts

U2-12 Output Term Sts

Function

Current Fault

Displays the current fault.

Previous Fault

Shows the previous fault.

Input Terminal Status at Previous

Fault

Displays the input terminal status at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-10.

Output Terminal Status at Previous

Fault

Displays the output status at the previous fault. Displays the same status displayed in U1-11.

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

--

--

--

Unit

--

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-27

Parameter

Code

U2-13

Parameter Name

Inverter Status

U2-14

U2-20

U2-28

U2-51

U2-52

U2-53

U2-54

U2-55

U2-56

U2-57

U2-58

U2-59

Elapsed time

Actual Fin Temp

Fault Axis

DC V Command

DC V Feedback

DC Current

AC Voltage

AC Current

DC Power

AC Power

AC Frequency

AC Current Ref

Function

Drive Operation Status at Previous

Fault

Displays the operation status of the converter at the previous fault.

Displays the same status displayed in U1-12.

Cumulative Operation Time at

Previous Fault

Displays the cumulative operation time at the previous fault.

Heatsink Temperature at Previous

Fault

Displays the temperature of the heatsink when the most recent fault occurred.

Malfunctioned Module

Displays the module where the previous fault occurred as a decimal number.

NOTE: This parameter is only available in 41040-D+.

DC Bus Voltage Reference at

Previous Fault (Before SFS)

Shows the DC Bus Voltage

Reference.

DC Bus Voltage Feedback at

Previous Fault

Shows the DC bus voltage feedback value.

DC Side Current at Previous Fault

Shows the estimated current on the bus on the DC side.

Power Supply Voltage at Previous

Fault

Shows the power supply voltage.

Power Supply Side Current at

Previous Fault

Shows the current on the power supply side.

DC Side Power at Previous Fault

Shows the power on the DC side.

Power Supply Side Power at

Previous Fault

Shows the power on the power supply side.

Power Supply Frequency at

Previous Fault

Shows the frequency on the power supply side.

Power Supply Side Current

Reference at Previous Fault

Shows the current reference on the power supply side when the most recent fault occurred.

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

Unit

--

1 H

1°C

--

1 V

1 V

1 A

1 V

1 A

1 kW

1 kW

0.1 Hz

1 A

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-28

Parameter

Code

U2-60

Parameter Name

Power Factor

U2-61 Active Current

U2-62

U2-63

U2-64

U2-65

U2-66

Reactive Current

DC V SFS Level

AVR Input

Voltage Ref (Vq)

Voltage Ref (Vd)

Function

Power Factor at Previous Fault

Shows the power factor when the most recent fault occurred.

Active Current Reference at

Previous Fault

Shows the active current when the most recent fault occurred.

Reactive Current Reference at

Previous Fault

Shows the reactive current when the most recent fault occurred.

DC Bus Voltage Reference at

Previous Fault (After SFS)

Shows the DC bus voltage reference after the soft starter.

Avr Input (Voltage Deviation) at

Previous Fault

Shows the Avr input.

Control Voltage Reference (Vq) at

Previous Fault

Shows the control voltage reference (Vq) when the most recent fault occurred.

Control Voltage Reference (Vd) at

Previous Fault

Shows the control voltage reference (Vd) when the most recent fault occurred.

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

Unit

1%

0.1%

0.1%

1 V

1 V

1 V

1 V

U3: Fault History

Parameter

Code

U3-01 to

U3-04

Parameter Name

Fault Message

U3-05 to

U3-10

Fault Message

U3-11 to

U3-14

Elapsed Time

U3-15 to

U3-20

Elapsed Time

Function

First to 4th Most Recent Fault

Displays the first to the fourth most recent faults.

5th to 10th Most Recent Fault

Displays the fifth to the tenth most recent faults. After ten faults, data for the oldest fault is deleted. The most recent fault appears in U3-

01, with the next most recent fault appearing in U3-02. The data is moved to the next monitor parameter each time a fault occurs.

Cumulative Operation Time at 1st to 4th Most Recent Fault

Displays the cumulative operation time when the first to the fourth most recent faults occurred.

Cumulative Operation Time at 5th to 10th Most Recent Fault

Displays the cumulative operation time when the fifth to the tenth most recent faults occurred.

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

Unit

--

--

1 h

1 h

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-29

U4: Maintenance Monitors

Parameter

Code

Parameter Name

U4-01 <4> Drv Elapsed Time

U4-02

U4-03 <5>

U4-04

U4-05

U4-06

U4-08

U4-09

RUN Cmd Counter

Fan Elapsed TIme

Fan Life Mon

Cap Life Mon

ChgCirc Life Mon

Heatsink Temp

LED Oper Check

Function

Cumulative Operation Time

Displays the cumulative operation time of the converter. The value for the cumulative operation time counter can be reset in parameter o4-01. Use parameter o4-02 to determine if the operation time should start as soon as the power is switched on or only while the

Run command is present. The maximum number displayed is

99999, after which the value is reset to 0.

Number of Run Commands

Displays the number of times the

Run command is entered. Reset the number of Run commands using parameter o4-13. This value will reset to 0 and start counting again after reaching 65535.

Cooling Fan Operation Time

Displays the cumulative operation time of the cooling fan. The default value for the fan operation time is reset in parameter o4-03. This value will reset to 0 and start counting again after reaching

99999.

Cooling Fan Maintenance

Displays main cooling fan usage time as a percentage of its expected performance life.

Parameter o4-03 can be used to reset this monitor. Replace the fan when this monitor reaches 90%.

Capacitor Maintenance

Displays main circuit capacitor usage time as a percentage of their expected performance life.

Parameter o4-05 can be used to reset this monitor.

Replace the capacitor when this monitor reaches 90%.

Soft Charge Bypass Relay

Maintenance

Displays the soft charge bypass relay maintenance time as a percentage of its estimated performance life. Parameter o4-07 can be used to reset this monitor.

Replace the soft charge bypass relay when this monitor reaches

90%.

Heatsink Temperature

Displays the heatsink temperature.

LED Check

Lights all segments of the LED to verify that the display is working properly.

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

10 V: 100°C

No signal output available

Unit

1 h

1 time

1 h

1%

1%

1%

1°C

--

<4> The MEMOBUS/Modbus communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register number 0099H.

<5> The MEMOBUS/Modbus communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register number 009BH.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-30

Parameter

Code

U4-13

U4-18

U4-20

U4-35

U4-36

U4-37

U4-38

Parameter Name

Current PeakHold

Reference Source

Option Freq Ref

UV Alarm Axis

OV Alarm Axis

OH Alarm Axis

FAN Alarm Axis

Function

Peak Hold Current

Displays the highest current value that occurred during run.

DC BUS Voltage Reference

Source Selection

Displays the source for the DC

BUS voltage reference as XY-nn.

X: indicates which reference is used:

1 = Reference 1 (b1-01)

Y-nn: indicates the reference source

0-01 = Digital operator

1-01 = Analog (terminal A1)

1-02 = Analog (terminal A2)

1-03 = Analog (terminal A3)

3-01 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications

4-01 = Communication option card

8-01 = Depends on b1-18

Option DC voltage Reference

Displays the DC bus voltage reference input by an option card

(decimal).

Power Supply Module

Undervoltage (Uv)

Displays the module where power supply Undervoltage (Uv) occurred in binary.

NOTE: This setting is available only in model 41040-

D+.

Power Supply Module Overvoltage

(ov)

Displays the module where power supply Overvoltage (ov) occurred in binary.

NOTE: This setting is available only in model 41040-

D+.

Heatsink Overheat (oH) Module

Displays the module where

Heatsink Overheat (oH) occurred in binary.

NOTE: This setting is available only in model 41040-

D+.

Cooling Fan Error (FAn) Module

Displays the module where

Cooling Fan Error (FAn) occurred in binary.

NOTE: This setting is available only in model 41040-

D+.

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

No signal output available

0.01%

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

No signal output available

Unit

1 A

--

--

--

--

--

--

<4> The MEMOBUS/Modbus communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register number 0099H.

<5> The MEMOBUS/Modbus communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register number 009BH.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-31

U6: Operation Status Monitors

Parameter

Code

U6-80 to

U6-99

Parameter Name

Function

Option Monitors 1 to 20

Shows the monitor information for

Option Monitor 1 (876 hex) to 20

(8FF hex).

This information is displayed when option cards are connected.

230 V Class: 100% = 400 VDC

460 V Class: 100% = 800 VDC

Analog Output

Level

No signal output available

Unit

--

U9: Operation Status Monitor

Parameter

Code

U9-01

Parameter Name

GWh Consumed

U9-02

U9-03

MWh Consumed kWh Consumed

Function

Electric Power (GWh)

Shows the total amount of electric power.

Electric Power (MWh)

Shows the total amount of electric power.

Electric Power (kWh)

Shows the total amount of electric power.

Analog Output

Level

0 to 999

0 to 999

0 to 999

Unit

1GWh

1MWh

1kWh

U9-04

U9-05

U9-06

Regenerative Power

(GWh)

Regenerative Power

(MWh)

Regenerative Power

(kWh)

GWh Produced

Shows the total amount of regenerated power.

MWh Produced

Shows the total amount of regenerated power.

kWh Produced

Shows the total amount of regenerated power.

0 to 999

0 to 999

0 to 999

1GWh

1MWh

1kWh

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-32

Parameter

Code

U9-07 to

U9-10

Parameter Name

Consumed [ ] ($)

Function

Electric Power Rates 1 to 4

These parameters show the electric power rate in Power Unit

Price (o4-19) that is calculated from the total electrical power consumptions in U9-01 to U9-03.

U9-10: Digit 1 to digit 3

U9-09: Digit 4 to digit 6

U9-08: Digit 7 to digit 9

U9-07: Digit 10 to digit 12

Analog Output

Level

0 to 999

Unit

--

U9-11 to

U9-14

Produced [ ] ($)

The unit price is set in o4-19, and

U9-07 to U9-10 are U9-01 to U9-

03 times o4-19.

Regenerative Power Rates 1 to 4

These parameters show the regenerative power rate in Power

Unit Price (o4-19) that is calculated from the total electrical power consumptions in U9-04 to

U9-06.

U9-14: Digit 1 to digit 3

U9-13: Digit 4 to digit 6

U9-12: Digit 7 to digit 9

U9-11: Digit 10 to digit 12

0 to 999 --

The unit price is set in o4-19, and

U9-11 to U9-14 are U9-04 to U9-

06 times o4-19.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-33

Defaults by Converter Model

The following tables show parameters and default settings that change with o2-04 (drive model selection).

Table B-1: 230 V Class Model Default Settings by Converter Model Selection

No.

--

Name

Model o2-04 Model Selection

d8-01

L2-02

L2-05

DC Bus Voltage Reference

Momentary Power Loss

Ride-Thru Time

Undervoltage Detection

Level (Uv)

AUv Detection Level

Overheat Alarm Level

L2-21

L8-02

L8-09

L8-66

Output Ground Fault

Detection Selection

Power Supply Fault

Detection Voltage Level

C7-47 Adjustment Reactor 1

C7-51 Adjustment Reactor 2

C6-02

L8-35

Carrier Frequency

Selection

Installation Method

Selection

Unit

--

Hex

V s

% mH mH

--

V

V

°C

--

--

2015-D+

68

330

1.0

50

2.450

0.809

3

190

150

110

1

0

2030-D+

6B

330

1.0

50

1.267

0.418

3

190

150

125

1

0

2057-D+

6E

330

2.0

50

0.645

0.213

3

190

150

115

1

0

Default Settings

2083-D+ 2140-D+

70

330

2.0

73

330

2.0

50

0.443

0.146

3

190

150

125

1

0

50

0.263

0.087

2

190

150

130

1

0

2200-D+

75

330

2.0

50

0.184

0.061

2

190

150

135

1

0

2270-D+

76

330

2.0

50

0.136

0.045

2

190

150

135

1

0

2400-D+

78

330

2.0

50

0.092

0.030

2

190

150

130

1

0

Table B-2: 460 V Class Model Default Settings by Converter Model Selection

No.

--

Name

Model

Unit

-o2-04 Model Selection Hex

d8-01

L2-02

DC Bus Voltage

Reference

Momentary Power

Loss Ride-Thru Time

L2-05

Undervoltage

Detection Level (Uv)

L2-21 AUv Detection Level

L8-02

Overheat Alarm

Level

L8-09

L8-66

Output Ground Fault

Detection Selection

Power Supply Fault

Detection Voltage

Level

C7-47

C7-51

C6-02

L8-35

Adjustment Reactor

1

Adjustment Reactor

2

Carrier Frequency

Selection

Installation Method

Selection

V s

V

V

°C

--

% mH mH

--

--

4008-

D+

97

660

0.5

380

300

110

1

50

9.189

3.308

3

0

50

4.594

1.654

3

0

4016-

D+

9A

660

1.0

380

300

115

1

4030-

D+

9D

660

2.0

380

300

115

1

50

2.450

0.882

3

0

50

1.710

0.615

3

0

4043-

D+

9F

660

2.0

380

300

115

1

4058-

D+

A1

660

2.0

380

300

115

1

2.0

380

300

130

1

Default Settings

4086-

D+

4145-

D+

A3

660

A5

660

2.0

380

300

140

1

4210-

D+

A7

660

2.0

380

300

145

1

50

1.267

0.456

3

0

50

0.855

0.308

3

0

50

0.507

0.183

2

0

50

0.350

0.126

2

0

50

0.245

0.088

2

0

4300-

D+

A9

660

2.0

380

300

140

1

4410-

D+

AC

660

2.0

380

300

130

1

50

0.179

0.065

1

0

50

0.131

0.047

1

0

4560-

D+

AE

660

2.0

380

300

130

1

41040-

D+

B2

660

2.0

380

300

130

1

50

0.064

0.023

1

0

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

B-34

A p p e n d i x

C

Standards Compliance

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-2

This page intentionally left blank.

Section Safety

WA R N I N G

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

Do not operate equipment with covers removed.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

The diagrams in this section may show converters without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the converters and run the converters according to the instructions described in this manual.

Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.

Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.

Do not touch any terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the converter before touching any components.

Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the converter.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Installation, maintenance, inspection, and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment, and maintenance of AC converters.

Do not perform work on the converter while wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or lack of eye protection.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning work on the converter.

Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

FIRE HAZARD

Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.

Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections.

Do not use an improper voltage source.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.

Verify that the rated voltage of the converter matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.

Do not use improper combustible materials.

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.

Attach the converter to metal or other noncombustible material.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-3

N O T I C E

Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the converter and circuit boards.

Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the converter circuitry.

Never connect or disconnect the motor from the converter while the converter is outputting voltage.

Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the converter.

Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring.

Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the converter.

Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter.

Do not modify the converter circuitry.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter and will void warranty.

Magnetek is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.

Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the converter and connecting any other devices.

Failure to comply could result in damage to the converter.

If a fuse is blown or a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of the peripheral devices.

Contact your supplier if the cause cannot be identified after checking the above.

Do not restart the converter immediately operate the peripheral devices if a fuse is blown or a GFCI is tripped.

Check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact your supplier before restarting the converter or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-4

European Standards

Figure C-1: CE Mark

The CE mark indicates compliance with European safety and environmental regulations. It is required for engaging in business and commerce in Europe.

European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage

Directive for electronics manufacturers, and the EMC guidelines for controlling electrical noise.

This converter displays the CE mark based on the EMC guidelines and the Low Voltage Directive.

• Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC

• EMC Guidelines: 2004/108/EC

Devices used in combination with this converter must also be CE certified and display the CE mark.

When using converter displaying the CE mark in combination with other devices, it is ultimately the responsibility of the user to ensure compliance with CE standards. After setting up the device, verify that conditions meet European standards.

CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance

This converter has been tested according to European standard IEC61800-5-1, and it fully complies with the Low Voltage Directive.

To comply with the Low Voltage Directive, be sure to meet the following conditions when combining this converter with other devices:

Area of Use

Do not use converter in areas with pollution higher than severity 2 and overvoltage category 3 in accordance with IEC664.

Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Install appropriate harmonic filter module that has built-in input fuses to the input side to protect converter wiring and prevent other secondary damage. Select harmonic filter module according to

Table C-1.

Refer to Power Ratings on page A-3 for details on the converter Input Current and Rated Output

Current.

N O T I C E

If a fuse is blown or a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact Magnetek before restarting the converter or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-5

Table C-1: Harmonic Filter Module and Recommended Fuses

Model

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

4008-D+

4016-D+

4030-D+

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

Harmonic Filter

Module

HF-2015-D+

HF-2030-D+

HF-2057-D+

HF-2083-D+

HF-2140-D+

HF-2200-D+

HF-2270-D+

HF-2400-D+

HF-4008-D+

HF-4016-D+

HF-4030-D+

HF-4043-D+

HF-4058-D+

HF-4086-D+

HF-4145-D+

HF-4210-D+

HF-4300-D+

--

--

--

Fuse

230 V Class

350GH-32ULTC

350GH-50ULTC

350GH-125ULTC

170M1371

350GH-250ULTC

170M4015

170M4016

170M4019

460 V Class

660GH-16ULTC

660GH-40ULTC

660GH-63ULTC

170M1369

170M1370

660GH-200ULTC

660GH-315ULTC

170M4016

170M4018

170M6014

170M6016

170M6016

Manufacturer

HINODE

HINODE

HINODE

BUSSMANN

HINODE

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

HINODE

HINODE

HINODE

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

HINODE

HINODE

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

Fuse Ampere

Rating (A)

32

50

125

250

250

550

630

900

200

200

315

630

16

40

63

160

800

1000

1250

1250

Grounding

The converter is designed to be used in T-N (grounded neutral point) networks. If installing the converter in other types of grounded systems, contact your Magnetek representative for instructions.

Guarding Against Harmful Materials

When installing IP00 enclosure converters, use an enclosure that prevents foreign material from entering the converter from above or below.

EMC Guidelines Compliance

This converter is tested according to European standards IEC/EN61800-3: 2004, and complies with the European standards IEC/EN12015 (requires an optional AC reactor) and IEC/EN12016.

EMC Filter Installation

The following conditions must be met to ensure continued compliance with guidelines. Refer to EMC

Filters on page C-8 for EMC filter selection.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-6

Installation Method

Verify the following installation conditions to ensure that other devices and machinery used in combination with this converter also comply with EMC guidelines.

1. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side specified by Magnetek for compliance with European standards.

2. Place the converter and EMC noise filter in the same enclosure.

3. Use braided shield cable for the converter and motor wiring, or run the wiring through a metal conduit.

4. Keep wiring as short as possible. Ground the shield on both the converter side and the motor side.

5. Make sure the protective earthing conductor complies with technical standards and local safety regulations.

Connection Diagram

Figure C-2: Ground Area

Figure C-3: Wiring Diagram for EMC (Models 2015-D+ to 2400-D+, 4008-D+ to 4300-

D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-7

Figure C-4: Wiring Diagram for EMC (Models 4410-D+, 4560-D+)

EMC Filters

The converter should be installed with the EMC filters listed in Table C-2 in order to comply with the

IEC/EN61800-3 requirements.

Table C-2: IEC/EN61800-3 Filters

Model

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

4008-D+

4016-D+

Type

RTEN-2030D6E2-00

RTEN-2030D6E2-00

RTEN-2060G6E2-00

RTEN-2100G6E2-00

RTEN-2150G6E2-00

B84143B0320S176

B84143B0320S176

B84143B0400S176

B84143A0020R106

B84143A0020R106

Manufacturer

Rated

Current (A)

Weight kg (lb)

TDK-Lambda

TDK-Lambda

TDK-Lambda

TDK-Lambda

TDK-Lambda

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

230 V Class

30

30

60

100

150

320

320

400

6.5

(14.3)

25

(55)

25

(55)

25

(55)

0.56

(1.2)

0.56

(1.2)

3.9

(8.6)

4.2

(9.3)

460 V Class

20

20

0.6

(1.3)

0.6

(1.3)

Dimensions

[W x H x D] mm

(in)

146 × 42 × 70

(5.7 × 1.7 × 2.8)

146 × 42 × 70

(5.7 × 1.7 × 2.8)

267 × 85 × 161

(10.5 × 3.3 × 6.3)

267 × 85 × 161

(10.5 × 3.3 × 6.3)

290 × 88 × 190

(11.4 × 3.5 × 7.5)

605 × 140 × 220

(23.8 × 5.5 × 8.6)

605 × 140 × 220

(23.8 × 5.5 × 8.6)

605 × 140 × 220

(23.8 × 5.5 × 8.6)

60 × 130

(2.4 × 5.1)

60 × 130

(2.4 × 5.1)

135 × 247

(5.3 × 9.7)

135 × 247

(5.3 × 9.7)

164 × 270

(6.5 × 10.6)

200 × 450

(7.9 × 17.7)

200 × 450

(7.9 × 17.7)

200 × 450

(7.9 × 17.7)

150 × 58 × 57.5

(5.9 × 2.3 × 2.3)

150 × 58 × 57.5

(5.9 × 2.3 × 2.3)

Y x X mm (in)

28 × 132.5

(1.1 × 5.2)

28 × 132.5

(1.1 × 5.2)

Figure

C-5

C-5

C-6

C-7

C-8

C-9

C-9

C-9

C-10

C-10

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-8

Model Type

4030-D+

B84143A0035R106

4043-D+

B84143A0065R106

4058-D+

B84143A0065R106

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

B84143B0180S080

B84143B0180S080

B84143B0400S080

B84143B0400S080

B84143B1000S080

B84143B1000S080

B84143B1600S080

Manufacturer

Rated

Current (A)

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

EPCOS

35

65

65

180

180

400

400

1000

1000

1000

Weight kg (lb)

5

(11.0)

7.5

(16.5)

7.5

(16.5)

18.5

(41)

0.9

(2.0)

1.9

(4.2)

1.9

(4.2)

5

(11.0)

18.5

(41)

24.5

(54)

Dimensions

[W x H x D] mm

(in)

200 × 71 × 72.5

(7.9 × 2.8 × 2.8)

217 × 80 × 84.5

(8.5 × 3.1 × 3.3)

217 × 80 × 84.5

(8.5 × 3.1 × 3.3)

270 × 114 × 170

(10.6 × 4.5 × 6.7)

270 × 114 × 170

(10.6 × 4.5 × 6.7)

320 × 120 × 190

(12.6 × 4.7 × 7.5)

320 × 20 × 190

(12.6 × 4.7 × 7.5)

410 × 140 × 260

(16.1 × 5.5 × 10.2)

410 × 140 × 260

(16.1 × 5.5 × 10.2)

490 × 140 × 260

(19.3 × 5.5 × 10.2)

Y x X mm (in)

50 × 142.5

(2 × 5.6)

65 × 152.5

(2.6 × 6)

65 × 152.5

(2.6 × 6)

155 × 145

(6.1 × 5.7)

155 × 145

(6.1 × 5.7)

165 × 170

(6.5 × 6.7)

165 × 170

(6.5 × 6.7)

235 × 240

(9.3 × 9.4)

235 × 240

(9.3 × 9.4)

235 × 240

(9.3 × 9.4)

Figure

C-11

C-12

C-12

C-13

C-13

C-14

C-14

C-15

C-15

C-16

Figure C-5: EMC Filter Dimensions (2015-D+, 2030-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-9

Figure C-6: EMC Filter Dimensions (2057-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-10

Figure C-7: EMC Filter Dimensions (2083-D+)

Figure C-8: EMC Filter Dimensions (2140-D+)

Figure C-9: EMC Filter Dimensions (2200-D+ to 2400-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-11

Figure C-10: EMC Filter Dimensions (4008-D+, 4016-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-12

Figure C-11: EMC Filter Dimensions (4030-D+)

Figure C-12: EMC Filter Dimensions (4043-D+, 4058-D+)

Figure C-13: EMC Filter Dimensions (4086-D+, 4145-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-13

Figure C-14: EMC Filter Dimensions (4210-D+, 4300-D+)

Figure C-15: EMC Filter Dimensions (4410-D+, 4560-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-14

Figure C-16: EMC Filter Dimensions (41040-D+)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-15

UL Standards

UL Standards

The RU mark applies to products in the United States and Canada and it means that UL has performed product testing and evaluation and determined that their stringent standards for product safety have been met. For a product to receive UL certification, all components inside that product must also receive UL certification.

UL Standards Compliance

This converter is tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C and complies with UL requirements. To ensure continued compliance when using this converter in combination with other equipment, meet the following conditions:

Installation Area

Do not install the converter to an area greater than pollution severity 2 (UL standard).

Ambient Temperature

IP00/ Open Type Enclosure: -10°C to +50°C

IP20/ Open Type Enclosure: -10°C to +40°C

Main Circuit Terminal Wiring

Magnetek recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all converter models. To maintain UL/ cUL approval, UL-Listed closed-loop crimp terminals are specifically required when wiring the converter main circuit terminals on models 2083-D+ to 2400-D+, 4043-D+ to 41040-D+. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping. Refer to Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal

Recommendations on page C-21 for closed-loop crimp terminal recommendations. The wire gauges listed in the following tables are Magnetek recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire gauge selections.

NOTE: The mark indicates the terminals for protective ground connection as defined in IEC/

EN60417-5019.

Grounding impedance:

230 V: 100 Ω or less

460 V: 10 Ω or less

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-16

Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques

Table C-3: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 230 V Class)

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

Recomm. Gauge

AWG, kcmil

12

2015-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2030-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2057-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2083-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2140-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

12

14

10

8

8

14

10

4

4

14

6

2

2

14

4

3 x 2P

1/0 x 2P

14

4

Wire Range

AWG, kcmil

12 to 6

12 to 6

14

16 to 10

8 to 6

8 to 6

14

12 to 10

4 to 1

4 to 1

14

8 to 6

2 to 2/0

2 to 2/0

14 to 10

6 to 4

3 to 2/0

1/0 to 2/0

14 to 10

4

Screw Size

M4

M4

M3.5

M6

M4

M4

M3.5

M6

M6

M6

M3.5

M6

M8

M8

M4

M8

M8

M8

M4

M10

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

9.0 to 11

(79.7 to 97.4)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

Tightening Torque

N-m (lb-in)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

3.6 to 4.0

(31.9 to 35.4)

3.6 to 4.0

(31.9 to 35.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-17

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

Recomm. Gauge

AWG, kcmil

3/0 x 2P

2200-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

3/0 x 2P

14

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2270-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

1

3/0 × 2P

3/0 × 2P

14

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

2400-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

1/0

300 x 2P

300 x 2P

14

2/0

Wire Range

AWG, kcmil

3/0 to 300

3/0 to 300

14 to 10

1 to 1/0

3/0 to 300

3/0 to 300

14 to 10

1/0 to 4/0

300 to 600

300 to 600

14 to 10

2/0 to 4/0

Screw Size

M12

M12

M4

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

Tightening Torque

N-m (lb-in)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

Table C-4: Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 460 V Class)

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

Recomm. Gauge

AWG, kcmil

12

4008-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

12

14

12

Wire Range

AWG, kcmil

12 to 6

12 to 6

14

14 to 12

Screw Size

M4

M4

M3.5

M6

Tightening Torque

N-m (lb-in)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-18

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

Recomm. Gauge

AWG, kcmil

12

4016-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

12

14

10

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4030-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

8

8

14

8

6 R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4043-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

6

14

6

4 R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4058-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

4

14

6

2 R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4086-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

2

14

6

Wire Range

AWG, kcmil

12 to 6

12 to 16

14

12 to 10

8 to 1

8 to 1

14

10 to 8

6 to 2/0

6 to 2/0

14 to 10

8 to 6

4 to 2/0

4 to 2/0

14 to 10

6

2 to 2/0

2 to 2/0

14 to 10

6

Screw Size

M4

M4

M3.5

M6

M6

M6

M3.5

M6

M8

M8

M4

M8

M8

M8

M4

M8

M8

M8

M4

M10

9.0 to 11

(79.7 to 97.4)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.20

(9.7 to 10.6)

9.0 to 11

(79.7 to 97.4)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

Tightening Torque

N-m (lb-in)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

2.1 to 2.3

(18.6 to 20.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

3.6 to 4.0

(31.9 to 35.4)

3.6 to 4.0

(31.9 to 35.4)

0.8 to 1.0

(7.1 to 8.9)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-19

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

Recomm. Gauge

AWG, kcmil

3 x 2P

4145-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

1/0 x 2P

14

3

3/0 x 2P R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4210-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

3/0 x 2P

14

1/0

3/0 to 2P R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4300-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

3/0 x 2P

14

1/0

300 x 2P R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4410-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

300 x 2P

14

2/0

4/0 x 4P R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

4560-D+

–, + r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

4/0 x 4P

14

4/0

1/0 to 4/0

300

300

14 to 10

2/0 to 4/0

4/0 to 300

4/0 to 300

14 to 10

2/0 to 300

Wire Range

AWG, kcmil

3 to 2/0

1/0 to 2/0

14 to 10

3

3/0 to 600

3/0 to 600

14 to 10

1/0 to 2/0

3/0 to 600

3/0 to 600

14 to 10

Screw Size

M8

M8

M4

M10

M10

M10

M4

M10

M12

M12

M4

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

M12

M12

M4

M12

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

Tightening Torque

N-m (lb-in)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

5.4 to 6.0

(47.8 to 53.1)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

18 to 23

(159 to 204)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-20

Model Terminal

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

Recomm. Gauge

AWG, kcmil

4/0 x 8P

–, +

41040-D+ r1/ 11, 1/

21, t1/ 31

4/0 x 8P

14

250

Wire Range

AWG, kcmil

4/0 to 300

4/0 to 300

14 to 10

2/0 to 300

Screw Size

M12

M12

M4

M12

Tightening Torque

N-m (lb-in)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

1.1 to 1.2

(9.7 to 10.6)

32 to 40

(283 to 354)

Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Recommendations

Magnetek recommends UL-listed crimp terminals made by JST and Tokyo DIP (or equivalent) for the insulation cap. Table C-5 matches the wire gauges and terminal screw sizes with Magnetekrecommended crimp terminals, tools, and insulation caps. Refer to the appropriate Wire Gauge and

Torque Specifications table for the wire gauge and screw size for your converter model. Place orders with a Magnetek representative or the Magnetek sales department. The closed-loop crimp terminal sizes and values listed in Table C-5 are Magnetek recommendations. Wire gauge values shown in

Table C-5 are the recommended values. Refer to local codes for proper selections.

Table C-5: Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size

Model

Wire Gauge (AWG, kcmil)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

Screw

Size

Crimp

Terminal

Model

Number

Tool

Machine

No.

Die Jaw

Insulation

Cap Model

No.

Code <1>

230 V Class

2015-D+

8

6

12

10

M4

R5.5-4

R5.5-4

8-4

14-NK4

YA-4

YA-4

YA-4

YA-4

AD-901

AD-901

AD-901

AD-902

TP-005

TP-005

TP-008

TP-014

100-054-029

100-054-029

100-054-031

100-054-032

2030-D+

4

3

8

6

M4

8-4

14-NK4

R22-6

38-6

YA-4

YA-4

YA-5

YA-5

AD-901

AD-902

AD-953

AD-954

TP-008

TP-014

TP-022

TP-038

100-054-031

100-054-032

100-051-262

100-092-577

2057-D+ M6

2

1

38-6

60-6

YA-5

YA-5

AD-954

AD-955

TP-038

TP-060

100-092-577

100-092-578

2

1

R38-8

R60-8

YA-5

YA-5

AD-954

AD-955

TP-038

TP-060

100-051-264

100-051-265

2083-D+

1/0

2/0

M8

R60-8

80-8

YA-5

YF-1,

YET-300-1

AD-955

TD-323

TD-312

TP-060

TP-080

100-051-265

100-092-579

<1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using two sets for each connection.

Example 1: Models with 300 kcmil for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for output terminals, so the user should order two sets of [100-051-561].

Example 2: Models with 4/0 AWG × 4P for both input and output require four sets for input terminals and four sets for output terminals, so the user should order eight sets of [100-051-559].

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-21

Model

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

Wire Gauge (AWG, kcmil)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

3 × 2P

2 × 2P

1 × 2P

1/0 × 2P

2/0 × 2P

250

300

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

3/0 × 2P

4/0 × 2P

3/0 × 2P

4/0 × 2P

250 × 2P

300 × 2P

1/0 × 2P

2/0 × 2P

Screw

Size

M8

M12

M12

Crimp

Terminal

Model

Number

R38-8

R38-8

R60-8

R60-8

80-8

80-L12

100-L12

150-L12

150-L12

80-L12

100-L12

150-L12

150-L12

Tool

Machine

No.

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

Die Jaw

AD-954

AD-954

AD-955

AD-955

TD-323,

TD-312

TD-323,

TD-312

TD-324,

TD-312

TD-325,

TD-313

TD-325,

TD-313

TD-323,

TD-312

TD-324,

TD-312

TD-325,

TD-313

TD-325,

TD-313

Insulation

Cap Model

No.

TP-038

TP-038

TP-060

TP-060

TP-080

TP-080

TP-100

TP-150

TP-150

TP-080

TP-100

TP-150

TP-150

Code <1>

100-051-264

100-051-264

100-051-265

100-051-265

100-092-579

100-051-558

100-051-560

100-051-562

100-051-562

100-051-558

100-051-560

100-051-562

100-051-562

460 V Class

4008-D+

4016-D+

8

6

12

10

8

6

12

10

M4

M4

R5.5-4

R5.5-4

8-4

14-NK4

R5.5-4

R5.5-4

8-4

14-NK4

YA-4

YA-4

YA-4

YA-4

YA-4

YA-4

YA-4

YA-4

AD-900

AD-900

AD-901

AD-902

AD-900

AD-900

AD-901

AD-902

TP-005

TP-005

TP-008

TP-014

TP-005

TP-005

TP-008

TP-014

100-054-029

100-054-029

100-054-031

100-054-033

100-054-029

100-054-029

100-054-031

100-054-033

4030-D+

4

3

8

6

M6

R8-6

R14-6

R22-6

38-6

YA-4

YA-4

YA-5

YA-5

AD-901

AD-902

AD-953

AD-954

TP-008

TP-014

TP-022

TP-038

100-092-620

100-051-261

100-051-262

100-092-577

2

1

38-6

60-6

YA-5

YA-5

AD-954

AD-955

TP-038

TP-060

100-092-577

100-092-578

<1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using two sets for each connection.

Example 1: Models with 300 kcmil for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for output terminals, so the user should order two sets of [100-051-561].

Example 2: Models with 4/0 AWG × 4P for both input and output require four sets for input terminals and four sets for output terminals, so the user should order eight sets of [100-051-559].

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-22

Model

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

Wire Gauge (AWG, kcmil)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

3 × 2P

2 × 2P

1 × 2P

250 × 2P

6

4

3

2

1

1/0

2/0

4

3

2

1

1/0

2/0

2

1

1/0

2/0

300

350

400

500

600

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

1/0 × 2P

2/0 × 2P

3/0 × 2P

4/0 × 2P

--

--

--

250

Screw

Size

M8

M8

M8

M8

M10

Crimp

Terminal

Model

Number

R14-8

R22-8

R38-8

R38-8

R60-8

R60-8

80-8

R22-8

R38-8

R38-8

R60-8

R60-8

80-8

R38-8

R60-8

R60-8

80-8

R38-8

R38-8

R60-8

R60-8

80-8

80-L10

100-L10

150-L10

R150-10

200-10

200-10

325-10

325-10

Tool

Machine

No.

YA-4

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YA-5

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

Die Jaw

AD-953

AD-954

AD-954

AD-955

AD-955

TD-323,

TD-312

AD-954

AD-955

AD-902

AD-953

AD-954

AD-954

AD-955

AD-955

TD-323,

TD-312

AD-955

TD-323,

TD-312

AD-954

AD-954

AD-955

AD-955

TD-323,

TD-312

TD-323,

TD-312

TD-324,

TD-312

TD-325,

TD-313

TD-325,

TD-313

TD-327,

TD-314

TD-327,

TD-314

TD-328,

TD-315

TD-328,

TD-315

Insulation

Cap Model

No.

TP-014

TP-022

TP-038

TP-038

TP-060

TP-060

TP-080

TP-022

TP-038

TP-038

TP-060

TP-060

TP-080

TP-038

TP-060

TP-060

TP-080

TP-038

TP-038

TP-060

TP-060

TP-080

TP-080

TP-100

TP-150

TP-150

TP-200

TP-200

TP-325

TP-325

Code <1>

100-051-035

100-051-263

100-051-264

100-051-264

100-051-265

100-051-265

100-092-579

100-051-263

100-051-264

100-051-264

100-051-265

100-051-265

100-092-579

100-051-264

100-051-265

100-051-265

100-092-579

100-051-264

100-051-264

100-051-265

100-051-265

100-092-579

100-051-557

100-051-559

100-051-561

100-051-272

100-051-563

100-051-563

100-051-565

100-051-565

<1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using two sets for each connection.

Example 1: Models with 300 kcmil for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for output terminals, so the user should order two sets of [100-051-561].

Example 2: Models with 4/0 AWG × 4P for both input and output require four sets for input terminals and four sets for output terminals, so the user should order eight sets of [100-051-559].

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-23

Model

Wire Gauge (AWG, kcmil)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

Screw

Size

Crimp

Terminal

Model

Number

Tool

Machine

No.

Die Jaw

Insulation

Cap Model

No.

Code <1>

4300-D+

3/0 × 2P

4/0 × 2P

250 × 2P

300 × 2P

350 × 2P

400 × 2P

500

600

M12

80-L12

100-L12

150-L12

150-L12

200-L12

200-L12

325-12

325-12

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

TD-323,

TD-312

TD-324,

TD-312

TD-325,

TD-313

TD-325,

TD-313

TD-327,

TD-314

TD-327,

TD-314

TD-328,

TD-315

TD-328,

TD-315

TP-80

TP-100

TP-150

TP-150

TP-200

TP-200

TP-325

TP-325

100-051-557

100-051-559

100-051-561

100-051-561

100-051-564

100-051-564

100-051-277

100-051-277

4410-D+

4560-D+

300 × 2P

4/0 × 4P

250 × 4P

300 × 4P

M12

M12

150-L12

100-L12

150-L12

150-L12

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

TD-325,

TD-313

TD-324,

TD-312

TD-325,

TD-313

TD-325,

TD-313

TP-150

TP-100

TP-150

TP-150

100-051-561

100-051-559

100-051-561

100-051-561

41040-D+

4/0 × 8P

250 × 8P M12

100-L12

150-L12

YF-1,

YET-300-1

YF-1,

YET-300-1

TD-324,

TD-312

TD-325,

TD-313

TP-100

TP-150

100-051-559

100-051-561

300 × 8P 150-L12

YF-1,

YET-300-1

TD-325,

TD-313

TP-150 100-051-561

<1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using two sets for each connection.

Example 1: Models with 300 kcmil for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for output terminals, so the user should order two sets of [100-051-561].

Example 2: Models with 4/0 AWG × 4P for both input and output require four sets for input terminals and four sets for output terminals, so the user should order eight sets of [100-051-559].

NOTE: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated shrink tubing for wiring connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum allowable temperature of 75°C 600 VAC ULapproved vinyl-sheathed insulation.

Model

Wire Gauge (AWG, kcmil)

r1/ 11, 1/ 21, 31

Screw

Size

Crimp

Terminal

Model

Number

Tool

Machine

No.

Die Jaw

Insulation

Cap Model

No.

Code <1>

2015-D+ to 2057-D+,

4008-D+ to 4030-D+

14 M3.5

R2-3.5

YA-4 AD-900 TP-003 100-106-516

<1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using two sets for each connection.

Example 1: Models with 300 kcmil for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for output terminals, so the user should order two sets of

[100-051-561].

Example 2: Models with 4/0 AWG × 4P for both input and output require four sets for input terminals and four sets for output terminals, so the user should order eight sets of [100-051-559].

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-24

Model

Wire Gauge (AWG, kcmil)

r1/ 11, 1/ 21, 31

Screw

Size

Crimp

Terminal

Model

Number

Tool

Machine

No.

Die Jaw

Insulation

Cap Model

No.

Code <1>

2083-D+ to 2400-D+,

4043-D+ to 41040-D+

14 M4 R2-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-003 100-106-517

<1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using two sets for each connection.

Example 1: Models with 300 kcmil for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for output terminals, so the user should order two sets of

[100-051-561].

Example 2: Models with 4/0 AWG × 4P for both input and output require four sets for input terminals and four sets for output terminals, so the user should order eight sets of [100-051-559].

Installing Input Fuses

N O T I C E

If a fuse is blown or a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of the peripheral devices. Check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact Magnetek before restarting the converter or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.

Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Magnetek recommends installing an appropriate harmonic filter that has built-in input fuses to maintain compliance with UL508C.

The fuses are listed in Table C-6.

Table C-6: Recommended Branch Circuit Protection

Model

2015-D+

2030-D+

2057-D+

2083-D+

2140-D+

2200-D+

2270-D+

2400-D+

4008-D+

4016-D+

4030-D+

4043-D+

4058-D+

4086-D+

4145-D+

4210-D+

4300-D+

Harmonic Filter

Module

HF-2015-D+

HF-2030-D+

HF-2057-D+

HF-2083-D+

HF-2140-D+

HF-2200-D+

HF-2200-D+

HF-2400-D+

HF-4008-D+

HF-4016-D+

HF-4030-D+

HF-4043-D+

HF-4058-D+

HF-4086-D+

HF-4145-D+

HF-4210-D+

HF-4300-D+

Fuse

230 V Class

350GH-32ULTC

350GH-50ULTC

350GH-125ULTC

170M1371

350GH-250ULTC

170M4015

170M4016

170M4019

460 V Class

660GH-16ULTC

660GH-40ULTC

660GH-63ULTC

170M1369

170M1370

660GH-200ULTC

660GH-315ULTC

170M4016

170M4018

Manufacturer

HINODE

HINODE

HINODE

BUSSMANN

HINODE

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

Fuse Ampere

Rating (A)

250

550

630

900

32

50

125

250

HINODE

HINODE

HINODE

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

HINODE

HINODE

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

16

40

63

160

200

200

315

630

800

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-25

Model

4410-D+

4560-D+

41040-D+

Harmonic Filter

Module

--

--

--

Fuse

170M6014

170M6016

170M6016

Manufacturer

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

BUSSMANN

Fuse Ampere

Rating (A)

1000

1250

1250

Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals

Wire low voltage wires with NEC Class 1 circuit conductors. Refer to national state or local codes for wiring. The external power supply shall be a UL listed Class 2 power supply source or equivalent only.

Table C-7: Control Circuit Terminal Power Supply

Input/Output

Multi-function digital inputs

Multi-function analog inputs

Terminal Signal

S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6,

S7, S8, SC

+V, –V, A1, A2, A3, AC

Power Supply Specifications

Use the internal LVLC power supply of the converter.

Use class 2 for external power supply.

Converter Short-Circuit Rating

This converter is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 VAC for 230 V class converters and 480 VAC for 460 V class converters, when protected by fuses as specified on the Table C-6.

IMPULSE®•D+ Instruction Manual - April 2016

C-26

advertisement

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents